MCCB Eaton

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures
27.0-1
December 2013
Molded-Case Circuit
Breakers & Enclosures
Sheet 27 001
CA08104001E
Contents
22

Breaker Type Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-2
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0-3
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1-1
Special Function Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2-1
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3-1
Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4-1
Specifications
See Eatons Product Specification Guide, available on CD or on the Web.
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995
2010
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . Section 16475
Section 26 28 11
Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16904
Section 26 28 50
Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16476
Section 26 28 16.11
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants
27.0-2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

Breaker Type Comparison
December 2013
Sheet 27 002
22
23
24
25
26
Summary of Differences Between Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers,

Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers and Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
There are two main classifications of low voltage circuit
breakersmolded-case circuit breakers and low voltage
power circuit breakers. All UL, NEMA and ANSI standards
are for molded-case circuit breakers and low voltage
power circuit breakers.
The industry recognizes three types of circuit breakers
molded-case circuit breakers (MCCB), insulated-case circuit
breakers (ICCB) and low voltage power circuit breakers
LVPCB). Insulated-case circuit breakers are designed to
meet the standards for molded-case circuit breakers.
Low voltage power circuit breakers comply with the

following standards:
ANSI Std. C37.16Preferred Ratings
ANSI Std. C37.17Trip Devices for LVPCB
ANSI Std. C37.50Test Procedures
IEEE Std. C37.13LVPCB Used in Enclosures
UL 1066LVPCB
Molded-case circuit breakers and insulated-case circuit

breakers typically comply with the following standards:
UL 489MCCB
UL 489Molded-Case Switches (MCS)
NEMA AB1MCCB and MCS
NEMA AB3MCCB Application
27
28
Table 27.0-1. Breaker Type Comparison Chart
29
Description
LVPCB
(Type Magnum DS and Series NRX)
ICCB
(Type Magnum SB and Series NRX)
MCCB
(QUICKLAG/Series C/Series G)
30
Select trip
short-time rating
Selective trip over full range of fault

currents up to interrupting rating
(high short-time ratings)
31
Selective trip over partial range of fault

currents within the interrupting rating
(medium short-time ratings). Typically
up to 35 kA
Selective trip over a smaller range of fault

currents within the interrupting rating (low
short-time ratings). Typically 1013 times
the frame size
Operator type
Types of operators: mechanically

operated and electrically operated
two-step stored energy
Types of operators: mechanically operated

over-center toggle or motor operator
32
Types of operators: mechanically

operated and electrically operated
two-step stored energy
Closing speed
5-cycle closing for electrically

operated devices
5-cycle closing for electrically

operated devices
Greater than 5-cycle closing for electrically

operated devices
Mounting
Available in drawout construction

permitting racking to a distinct test
position and removal for maintenance
Available in drawout construction

permitting racking to a distinct test
position and removal for maintenance
Typically fixed-mounted but large frame

sizes may be available in drawout
construction
Interrupting rating
Interrupting duty at 635 Vac:

42100 kA and current limiting with
or without fuses up to 200 kA

35 150 kA

22100 kA without fuses and up
to 200 kA with integral fuses or for
current-limiting type
Current limiting
Special current limiting types available

with or without fuses up to 200 kA
Special current limiting types available

without fuses up to 150 kA
Current limiting available with and without

fuses up to 200 kA
33
34
35
36
37
38
Relative cost
Higher
Medium
Low
Available
frame sizes
Small number of frame sizes available.

Typical 8006000A
Small number of frame sizes available.

Typical 8006000A
Large number of frame sizes available.

Typical 1002500A
Maintenance
Extensive maintenance possible on all

frame sizes
Limited maintenance possible on larger

frame sizes
Very limited maintenance possible on larger

frame sizes
Enclosure types
Used in enclosures, MCCs, switchboards

and switchgear
Used in enclosures, MCCs

and switchboards
Used in enclosures, panelboards,

switchboards, MCCs and control panels
Series ratings
Not available in series ratings
Not available in series ratings
Available in series ratings
Enclosed rating
100% continuous current rated in

its enclosure
80% continuous-current rated, unless

specifically stated to be rated 100% in
an enclosure
80% continuous-current rated, unless

specifically stated to be rated 100% in
an enclosure
Standards
ANSI/IEEE C37
UL 1066
NEMA AB1/AB3
UL 489 or UL 1066
NEMA AB1/AB3
UL 489
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.0-3
Sheet 27 003
22
23
24
25
26
27
Series G
Table of Contents
28
General Description
Circuit Breaker Components and Functions . . . . .
Electronic RMS Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Function Circuit Breakers
Molded-Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100% Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series Rated Breaker Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Breakers for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AFCI Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400 Hz Breaker Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HID Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting Control Solenoid Operated Breakers . . .
SWD Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HACR Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mining Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naval/Marine Rated Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Data
Continuous Ampere Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupting Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feeder Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Branch Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breakers Not hp Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slash Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Sizing/Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CA08104001E
27.1-1
27.1-2
27.1-7
27.2-1
27.2-1
27.2-3
27.2-5
27.2-8
27.2-12
27.2-12
27.2-13
27.2-14
27.2-16
27.2-19
27.2-19
27.2-19
27.2-19
27.2-19
27.2-20
27.2-20
27.2-20
27.3-1
27.3-1
27.3-1
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-2
27.3-3
27.3-4
27.3-6
27.3-6
27.3-7
27.3-8
Time Current Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breaker Selection Table100% Selective . . . .
Breaker Selection Table0.1 Sec Selective . .
Arc Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System . . . . . . .
Unusual Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverse-Feed Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker Selection Data
Overview Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . .
Series G Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . .
Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Industrial Circuit Breakers . . .
Industrial Circuit Breakers in Assemblies . . . . .
Electronic Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . .
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . .
QUICKLAG Solenoid-Operated
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series G Industrial Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . .
Series C Industrial Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . .
Series G Breaker Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series C Breaker Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker
for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breaker (MPCB). . . . . .
Power Monitoring and Metering
Module (PM3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Modules and Breakers. . . . . .
Circuit Breaker Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.3-9
27.3-10
27.3-14
27.3-22
27.3-35
27.3-36
27.3-37
27.3-38
29
30
31
27.4-1
27.4-1
27.4-4
27.4-5
27.4-6
27.4-7
27.4-8
27.4-10
27.4-11
27.4-11
32
27.4-13
27.4-19
27.4-25
27.4-33
27.4-34
36
27.4-35
27.4-38
27.4-40
38
27.4-41
27.4-44
27.4-45
27.4-50
33
34
35
37
39
40
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 004
22
This page intentionally left blank.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.1-1
Sheet 27 005
General Description
General Description
General Circuit
Breaker Information
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers
are designed to provide circuit
protection for low voltage distribution
systems. They are described by
NEMA as, . . . a device for closing
and interrupting a circuit between
separable contacts under both normal
and abnormal conditions, and furthermore as, . . . a breaker assembled
as an integral unit in a supporting
and enclosing housing of insulating
material. The NEC describes them
as, A device designed to open and
close a circuit by non-automatic
means, and to open the circuit
automatically on a predetermined
overload of current, without injury
to itself when properly applied within
its rating.
So designed, Eaton circuit breakers
protect conductors against overloads
and conductors and connected
apparatus, such as motors and
motor starters, against short circuits.
Circuit Breaker Components

and Functions
Being essentially high interrupting
capacity switches with repetitive
elements, Eaton circuit breakers
are comprised of three main
functional components. These are:
1. Trip elements (thermal-magnetic
or electronic)
2. Operating mechanism
3. Arc extinguishers
1. Trip Elements
The function of the trip element is to trip
the operating mechanism in the event
of a prolonged overload or short-circuit
current. To accomplish this, a thermalmagnetic trip action is provided.
Thermal trip action is achieved

through the use of a bimetal heated by
the load current. On a sustained overload, the bimetal will deflect, causing
the operating mechanism to trip.
Because bimetals are responsive to
the heat emitted by the current flow,
they allow a long-time delay on light
overloads, yet they have a fast
response on heavier overloads.
Magnetic trip action is achieved through
the use of an electromagnet in series
with the load current. This provides an
instantaneous tripping action when the
current reaches a predetermined value.
Front-adjustable magnetic trip elements
are supplied as standard on 250A frame
circuit breakers and above (except 100A
and 150A magnetic only breakers), all
other thermal-magnetic breakers have
non-adjustable magnetic trip elements.
Electronic RMS Trip Breakers

Eaton electronic trip breakers are
generally applied for applications
where high levels of system coordination are called for. Available from
202500A, todays electronic trip
breakers can provide superior
protection and coordination as well
as system alarms and diagnostics,
monitoring and communications.
Both the overload trip action and the
short-circuit trip action of breakers
with Digitrip electronic trip units
are achieved by the use of current
transformers and solid-state circuitry
that monitors the current and initiates
tripping through a flux shunt trip
when an overload or a short circuit
is present. All multiple-pole circuit
breakers have trip elements in each
pole and a common trip bar. An
abnormal circuit condition in any
one pole will cause all poles to open
simultaneously.
Electronic RMS trip breakers can
include trip features such as:
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers
Eaton thermal-magnetic breakers are

general purpose devices suitable for
the majority of breaker applications
and are considered the industry standard. Available from 15800A, thermalmagnetic breakers provide accurate
reliable overload and short-circuit
protection for conductors and
connected apparatus.
Adjustable long-time pickup

Adjustable short-time pickup
Adjustable long delay time
Adjustable short delay time
Adjustable instantaneous pickup
Adjustable ground fault pickup
Adjustable ground fault delay time
Zone selective interlocking
Communications
Trip unit adjustments are made by

setting switches on the front of the trip
unit or by programming the trip unit
electronically.
All electronic RMS trip breakers are
equipped with a manual push-to-trip
mechanism.
22
23
24
2. Operating Mechanism
The function of the operating mechanism is to provide a means of opening
and closing the breaker contacts. All
mechanisms are of the quick-make,
quick-break type and are trip free.
Trip free mechanisms are designed
so that the contacts cannot be held
closed against an abnormal circuit
condition and are sometimes referred
to as an overcenter toggle mechanism.
In addition to indicating whether the
breaker is on or off, the operating
mechanism handle indicates when the
breaker is tripped by moving to a
position midway between the extremes.
This distinct trip point is particularly
advantageous where breakers are
grouped, as in panelboard applications,
because it clearly indicates the faulty
circuit. The operating mechanism
contains a positive on feature. In the
normal switching operation, the
handle of the circuit breaker will not
be capable of being left readily at or near
the off position when the main contacts
are closed.
25
3. Arc Extinguishers
34
The function of the DE-ION arc

extinguisher is to confine, divide
and extinguish the arc drawn between
opening breaker contacts. It consists of
specially shaped steel grids isolated
from each other and supported by an
insulating housing. When the contacts
are opened, the arc drawn induces a
magnetic field in the grids, which in
turn draws the arc from the contacts
and into the grids. The arc is thus split
into a series of smaller arcs and the
heat generated is quickly dissipated
through the metal. These two actions
result in a rapid removal of ions from
the arc, which hastens dielectric buildup between the contacts and results in
rapid extinction of the arc.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 006
General DescriptionTrip Units
22
Electronic RMS Trip Unit

General
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Eaton offers the most comprehensive

range of electronic trip units in the
industry for molded-case circuit
breakers. All electronic trip units are rms
sensing and can be applied from 70A up
through 2500A. Eaton offers electronic
trip units as standard for circuit breakers
rated above 800A, and offers electronic
trip units as optional for circuit breakers
70A up through 800A.
Digitrip electronic trip units are AC
devices that employ microprocessorbased technology that provides a true
rms current sensing means for proper
correlation with thermal characteristics
of conductors and equipment. The
primary function of the Digitrip
electronic trip unit is to provide
circuit protection. This is achieved
by analyzing the secondary current
signals received from the circuit
breaker current sensors and initiating
trip signals to the circuit breaker shunt
trip when pre-set current levels and
time delay settings are exceeded. All
Eaton electronic trip units use a high
effective sampling rate to maintain
measurement accuracy, monitoring,
and protection with nonlinear loads
having harmonic content up to the
27th order.
Front-Adjustable Trip Units
Rating Plugs
Front-adjustable trip units are

electronic trip units that have up to
nine time-current setting options that
are set by switches mounted on the
front of the trip unit. The application
for front adjustable trip units would
be distribution systems that can be
coordinated within the range of
settings available and that do not
require sophisticated coordination
strategies to be applied down
through the distribution system to
small rated breakers.
Rating plugs provide a means to

establish the breakers continuous
current rating. Rating plugs are colorcoded and interchangeable to make it
easy to match the correct rating plug
with the correct trip unit. The same
rating plug can be applied to both 50
and 60 Hz distribution systems. Some
rating plugs are fixed and some have
an adjustable range of amperage
values for greater flexibility. Digitrip
310, 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units
can be supplied with either a fixed or
adjustable rating plug. Digitrip 310+
trip units are equipped with adjustable
rating plugs. OPTIM style trip units are
furnished with fixed rating plugs but
have a programmable Long Time
Pickup rating to allow application
over a range of amperage values.
Programmable Trip Units (OPTIM)

Programmable trip units are electronic
trip units that have up to 10 timecurrent setting options that are
programmed electronically by the
use of a programming device. The
application for programmable
trip units would be high integrity
distribution systems that require
superior levels of system coordination
coupled with system alarming,
diagnostics and monitoring.
Electronic trip units are applied to

distribution systems when high standards of protection and coordination
are called for. In addition, electronic
trip units can provide further enhanced
features such as alarming, diagnostics,
system monitoring and communications.
Cause of Trip Indication

All OPTIM and Digitrip 510, 610, 810
and 910 trip units include Cause-ofTrip indication LEDs. Breakers using
the RMS 310+ electronic trip unit
have the ability to output cause-of-trip
information through the test port. The
Cause-of-Trip LED module provides
trip information via LED indication.
The Digiview and Panelmount
Digiview can be installed in the
RMS 310+ test port to provide both
cause-of-trip information and phase
current through an LCD display.
Eaton RMS sensing trip units fall into

two main categories:
Front adjustable trip units
(Digitrip RMS 310, 310+,
510, 610, 810 and 910)
Programmable trip units
(Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050)
Cause-of-Trip LED Module
Digiview
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.1-3
Sheet 27 007

Table 27.1-1. The Digitrip Family of Low Voltage Electronic Trip Units
RMS 310
RMS 310+
RMS 510
OPTIM 550
RMS 610
RMS 810
RMS 910
OPTIM 1050
22
23
24
25
rms sensing
5 functions
Front adjustable
rms sensing
6 functions
Front adjustable
Optional display
for diagnostics
and load
monitoring
Zone selective
interlocking
Optional
Arcflash
Reduction
Maintenance
System
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Diagnostics
rms sensing
10 functions
Programmable
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Zone selective
interlocking
Communications
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Communications
Power and energy

monitoring
rms sensing
9 functions
Front adjustable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Communications
Power and energy

monitoring
Harmonics
rms sensing
10 functions
Programmable
Zone selective
interlocking
Load monitoring
Diagnostics
Communications
Power and energy

monitoring
Harmonics
26
27
28
29
30
31
Optional features.
Additional Protection Features

Discriminator/Making Current Release
Eatons Digitrip RMS electronic trip
units are designed and built with
safety and reliability in mind, both to
protect the user and the equipment, as
well as to make sure the trip functions
within its design parameters. By
providing a discriminator circuit to
Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip
units, as well as to Digitrip OPTIM 550
and 1050 trip units that do not have
an instantaneous setting, the user is
protected should a faulted circuit exist.
The discriminator (or making current
releases as it is often called) is set at
11 times the rating plug ampere rating
and is enabled for approximately the
first 10 cycles of current flow. Should
a fault condition exist, the breaker will
trip with no intentional time delay on
closing, protecting the user from a
potentially unsafe condition.
Instantaneous Override
In addition to a discriminator, an
instantaneous override is present in
all molded-case and insulated-case
circuit breakers to provide additional
protection for the breaker. The
instantaneous override is factory
set nominally just below the breaker
withstand rating.
CA08104001E
Trip Unit Overtemperature

Digitrip electronic trip units can operate
reliably in ambient temperatures that
range from 20 to 85C. In the unlikely
event that temperatures exceed this
ambient, the trip unit has a built-in
overtemperature trip to protect the trip
unit should the temperature exceed
these design parameters.
imposes a shorter delay time should

an additional overcurrent occur
before a sufficient cooldown period
has elapsed.
Thermal memory protects the
distribution system from cumulative
overheating caused by repeated overcurrent conditions. OPTIM trip units
allow this to be turned ON or OFF.
Thermal Memory
System Alarms
Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM

electronic trip units incorporate
powered thermal memory, i.e., the
units remember recent overcurrent
events that may have initiated the trip
timing sequence, and then returned to
nominal levels, halting the sequence
prior to trip initiation. In the event that
the current levels again exceed the
pickup set point within a few cycles of
the original pickup, the units memory
recalls the previous near trip and
automatically imposes a shorter
delay time. In effect, the unit treats
multiple time-related events as a
single continuous event thereby
preventing system damage due to
cumulative overheating.
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910

electronic trip units incorporate a
high load alarm capability. Set at 85%
of Ir, the alarm will be initiated once
the load current exceeds 85% for
40 seconds. Once this occurs, the
HILD message will flash in the display
window and the power/relay module
will operate to send a remote signal.
As a further enhancement, the trip

units incorporate an unpowered
thermal memory feature. In the event
that current levels cause the breaker
to trip and the breaker is immediately
reclosed, the trip unit remembers the
previous overcurrent trip and again
Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units

also offer a high load alarm capability
but with more flexibility. OPTIM trip
units have a high load alarm that can
be programmed to operate between
50% and 100% of Ir.
Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units
incorporate a ground fault alarm
capability. Settings available for ground
fault alarm are the same as for ground
fault trip. Once a ground fault alarm
occurs, both local and remote signal
indication is available (OPTIM 550
is remote only).
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 008
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
System Diagnostics
Current Monitoring
Whenever a circuit breaker trips, it is

normally imperative that the cause of
trip be determined quickly, the faulty
conditions rectified, and the breaker
put back into service. Digitrip RMS
510, 610, 810 and 910, and Digitrip
OPTIM electronic trip units incorporate
a complete package of systems
diagnostics to meet this challenge.
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 trip units

are capable of monitoring currents
in individual phases (A, B, C) as well
as ground currents. Digitrip OPTIM
550 and 1050 trip units are capable
of monitoring currents in individual
phases (A, B, C) as well as neutral
and ground currents.
Four cause-of-trip LEDs are embedded

in the front of the trip unit case,
indicating that the cause-of-trip
was either a long delay, short delay,
instantaneous or ground fault. Remote
signal indication for cause of trip as
well as magnitude of trip information
is also available.
Breakers using the RMS 310+
electronic trip unit have the ability
to output cause-of-trip information
through the test port. The Causeof-Trip LED module provides trip
information via LED indication. The
Digiview and Panelmount Digiview
can be installed to provide both
cause-of-trip information and phase
current through an LCD display.
Systems Monitoring
Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM
electronic trip units offer a complete
menu of monitoring capability to
include current, power and energy,
power factor, power quality harmonics,
and other related parameters with a
high level of accuracy.
Digital Display
Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 have
a large, easy-to-read four-digit alphanumeric display mounted on the trip
unit. The display is supported by LEDs
that indicate which parameter is being
displayed along with the unit the value
is displayed in, e.g., kA and so on.
Values are displayed in the digital

display window in kA. Accuracy of the
current monitored values is 2% of full
scale sensor rating.
Breakers using the Digitrip 310+
electronic trip unit have the ability
to output phase current monitoring
information through the test port. The
Digiview or Panelmount Digiview can
be installed to provide phase current
through an LCD display.
For current and voltage monitoring
with 0.5% accuracy of reading that can
be used with thermal-magnetic or
electronic trip units, refer to the Power
Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3)
on Page 27.4-41.
Power and Energy Monitoring

For the trip unit to calculate true
power and energy values, a Potential
Transformer Module (PTM) is required.
This PTM is mounted internally
(R-Frame and larger) or externally
(N-Frame or smaller) to the breaker,
and provides voltage to the trip unit.
The accuracy of power monitored

values is 4% of full scale sensor/
frame rating.
The accuracy of energy monitored
values is 5% of full scale sensor/
frame rating.
Both the RMS 910 and OPTIM 1050
report power factor. Digitrip RMS 910
trip units have the additional capability
of monitoring line-to-line voltage.
For Real Power and Reactive Power
monitoring with ANSI C12.1 revenue
class accuracy that can be used with
thermal-magnetic or electronic trip
units, refer to the Power Monitoring/
Metering Module (PM3) on
Page 27.4-41.
Harmonics Monitoring
Digitrip RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM
1050 trip units are capable of monitoring values of current harmonics.
Percentage of total harmonic content
can be monitored for each level of
harmonic content up to the 27th
harmonic. Additionally, a total
harmonic distortion (THD) value can
be calculated and displayed providing
the user with total system current
harmonic monitoring capability.
Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units

are capable of monitoring peak power
demand, present power demand, and
reverse power flow in MW. Additionally, both forward and reverse energy
consumption in MWh can be monitored. Digitrip OPTIM 1050 trip units
can also monitor the same power and
energy parameters, but the units are
displayed in kW and kWh.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.1-5
Sheet 27 009
Time-Current Curve Shaping
Short Delay (S)
Curve Shaping
3. Short Delay Pickup

Determines or sets the level
of fault current at which the
short-time trip delay countdown
is actuated.
Eaton Digitrip RMS 310 trip units are

available with up to five phase and
ground adjustments on the front of the
trip unit. Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units
are available with up to six phase and
ground adjustments on the front of the
trip unit. Selective system coordination
with both upstream and downstream
devices can be achieved to provide an
economic solution for less sophisticated
distribution systems.
4. Short Delay
Sets the amount of time the breaker
will carry both a low level and high
fault currents before tripping.
2B
2
2A
a. Flat Response
I2t out: For coordination with
other circuit breakers with
electronic trip devices.
b. I2t Response
I2t in: For coordination with
fuses and thermal-magnetic
breakers.
3
Time
4B
4
4A
5
7B
7
7A
Current in Multiples
Figure 27.1-1. Time-Current Curve Shaping

Note: See selection guide charts for
availability of adjustments.
Long Delay (L)

1. Long Delay Pickup
Determines the continuous
ampere rating of the breaker.
2. Long Delay Time
Determines the amount of time
the breaker will carry a low level
overload before tripping.
a. I2t Response
I2t in: For coordination with other
circuit breakers with electronic
trip devices and for coordination
with thermal-magnetic
circuit breakers.
b. I4t Response
fuses and upstream transformer damage curves.
Instantaneous (I)
5. Instantaneous Pickup
Determines the level of fault
current that will actuate a trip
with no time delay.
Ground Fault (G)

6. Ground Fault Pickup
Determines the level of fault
current at which the ground fault
trip delay countdown is actuated.
7. Ground Fault Delay
Determines the amount of time
the breaker will carry a ground
fault before tripping.
a. Flat Response
I2t out: For coordination with
other circuit breakers with
electronic ground fault settings.
b. I2t Response
zero sequence ground fault
relays, fuses and thermalmagnetic breakers.
For more sophisticated selective

coordination systems Digitrip RMS
510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units are
available with up to nine curve shaping
choices via switches on the front of
the unit. Curve shaping flexibility is
provided by dependent long and short
delay adjustments that are based on
continuous amperes (Ir) selection.
Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050 trip
units offer programmable curve
shaping via 10 curve shaping choices
that are programmed electronically
into the trip unit. OPTIM also offers
virtual infinite settings to allow the
user to optimize coordination for a
selectively coordinated distribution
system. In addition, time-current set
points can be downloaded via a
communication system from a central
personal computer. Digitrip OPTIM is
normally applied to systems where
system integrity is very important.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 010
22
Zone Selective Interlocking
23
Zone selective interlocking capabilities

are available with Digitrip RMS 310+
510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units as
well as Digitrip OPTIM 550 and
1050 trip units.
24
Note: Optional accessory on the OPTIM 550.
25
26
27
28
29
Ground Fault Setting:

1200A Pickup
0.5 Seconds Time Delay
Zone 1
Zone selective interlocking provides

increased system protection and can
reduce arc flash risk by allowing the
breaker closest to the fault to trip
without any preset time delays. This is
achieved by setting up the distribution
system as shown in Figure 27.1-2.
The hardwired connection between
the trip units sends a restraining signal
upstream, allowing the breaker closest
to the fault to act instantaneously. Zone
selective interlocking reduces stress
on the distribution system and can
reduce arc flash risk by isolating faults
without time delays.
Breaker
Number 1
Fault 1
600A Pickup
0.3 Seconds Time Delay
Zone 2
Breaker
Number 2
Zone Selective
Interlocking Wiring
Fault 2
30
31
Zone 3
300A Pickup
No Time Delay
32
Breaker
Number 3
33
Fault 3
34
35
36
37
Load
Figure 27.1-2. Zone Selective Interlocking
Fault 1
Fault 3
There are no interlocking signals.

The main breaker trip unit will initiate
the trip instantaneously.
The branch breaker trip unit will initiate

the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 3 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 2 trip unit; and
Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal
to Zone 1.
Fault 2
38
39
40
The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate

the trip instantaneously to clear the
fault; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 1 trip unit.
The Zone 1 trip unit will begin to time
out, and in the event that the feeder
breaker in Zone 2 would not clear
the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1
will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds.
41
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip units will

begin to time out, and in the event
that the branch breaker in Zone 3
would not clear the fault, the feeder
breaker in Zone 2 will clear the fault
in 0.3 seconds. Similarly, in the event
that the feeder breaker in Zone 2
would not clear the fault, the main
breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault
in 0.5 seconds.
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.1-7
Sheet 27 011
Accessories and Modifications
Internal Accessories
Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch
Shunt Trip
Note: For a complete listing of available

external accessories, see Volume 4Circuit
Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Section 25.
The alarm (signal)/lockout switch

monitors circuit breaker trip status and
provides remote signaling and interlocking capabilities when the circuit
breaker trips. For two-, three- and
four-pole circuit breakers, the alarm
(signal)/lockout switch consists of one
or two SPDT switches assembled to a
plug-in module mounted in retaining
slots in the top of the trip unit. The
SPDT switch contacts are identified as
make and break contacts. When the
circuit breaker trips, the make contact
closes and the break contact opens.
The shunt trip provides remote controlled

tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt
trip consists of an intermittent rated
solenoid with a tripping plunger and
a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in
module. When required for ground
fault protection applications, certain
AC rated shunt trips are suitable for
operation at 55% of rated voltage.
All internal accessories are of the

plug-in type and are listed for field
installation under UL File E64983.
Internal accessories for sealed circuit
breakers are listed under UL File E7819
for factory installation only. The
available plug-in accessories include
the following:
Alarm (signal)/lockout switch

Auxiliary switch
Shunt trip
Low energy shunt trip
Undervoltage release mechanism
Make
Break
22
23
24
25
Available in most AC and DC voltages.

Note: Approximate unlatching time
6 milliseconds. Approximate total
circuit breaker contact opening time
18 milliseconds. Endurance4000 electrical
operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with
Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included
with accessory kits.
26
27
28
29
ST
30
31
Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch
Auxiliary Switch
Typical Internal Plug-in Accessory Installed

in K-Frame Circuit Breaker
Different accessory wiring options are

available to satisfy most circuit breaker
mounting applications. The standard
wiring configuration is pigtail leads
exiting the rear of the base directly
behind the accessory. Optional
configurations include a terminal
block mounted on the same side of the
base as the accessory, leads exiting the
side of the base where the accessory
is mounted, and leads exiting the rear
of the base on the side opposite the
accessory. If accessory leads longer
than 18.00 inches (457.2 mm) are
required, side-mounted terminal
blocks should be used.
CA08104001E
The auxiliary switch provides circuit

breaker contact status information
by monitoring the position of the
molded crossbar containing the
moving contact arms. The auxiliary
switch is used for remote signaling
and interlocking purposes, and
consists of one or two SPDT switches
assembled to a plug-in module
mounted in retaining slots in the top
of the trip unit. Each SPDT switch has
one a and one b contact. When
the circuit breaker contacts are open,
the a contact is open and the b
contact is closed.
32
Shunt Trip
OPTIM Communications Kit

Eatons OPTIM Communications Kit
provides the option to field install
PowerNet communications into a K-, Lor N-Frame OPTIM 550 breaker. OPTIM
1050 trip units come equipped with
communications as standard.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
OPTIM Communications Kit
40
41
42
Auxiliary Switch
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 012
Accessories and Modifications
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Low Energy Shunt Trip

Low energy shunt trip devices are
designed to operate from low energy
output signals from dedicated current
sensors typically applied in ground
fault protection schemes. However,
with a proper control voltage source,
they may be applied in place of
conventional trip devices for special
applications. Flux paths surrounding
permanent magnets used in the shunt
trip assembly hold a charged spring
poised in readiness to operate the
circuit breaker trip mechanism. When
a 100 microfarad capacitor charged to
28 Vdc is discharged through the shunt
trip coil, the resultant flux opposes the
permanent magnet flux field, which
releases the stored energy in the
spring to trip the circuit breaker. As
the circuit breaker resets, the reset
arm is actuated by the circuit breaker
handle, resetting the shunt trip. The
plug-in module is mounted in retaining
slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is
intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions
required in control circuit.
31
32
ST
LE
With no voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit

breaker contacts will not touch when a
closing operation is attempted.
UV
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
External Accessories
Note: For a complete listing of available
external accessories, see Volume 4Circuit
Protection Catalog, CA08100005E, Section 25.
Non-Padlockable Handle Block

The nonlockable handle block secures
the circuit breaker handle in either the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to trip when
the handle block holds the circuit
breaker handle in the ON position.)
The device is positioned over the circuit
breaker handle and secured by a setscrew to deter accidental operation
of the circuit breaker handle. (Field
installation only.)
Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included)

The key interlock is used to externally
lock the circuit breaker handle in the
OFF position. When the key interlock is
locked, an extended deadbolt blocks
movement of the circuit breaker
handle. Uniquely coded keys are
removable only with the deadbolt
extended. Each coded key controls a
group of circuit breakers for a given
specific customer installation.
The key interlock assembly consists
of a mounting kit and a purchaser
supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting
kit comprises a mounting plate, which
is secured to the circuit breaker cover
in either the left- or right-pole position;
key interlock mounting hardware; and
a wire seal. Specific mounting kits are
required for individual key interlock
types. (Field installation only.)
Key Interlock Kit
33
Padlockable Handle Block
34
The device is positioned in the cover

opening to prevent handle movement.
Will accommodate one 5/16-inch
(8.0 mm) padlock.
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Undervoltage Release Mechanism

The undervoltage release mechanism
monitors a voltage (typically a line
voltage) and trips the circuit breaker
when the voltage falls to between 70
and 35% of the solenoid coil rating.
Note: Undervoltage release mechanism
accessories are not designed for, and
should not be used as, circuit interlocks.
The undervoltage release mechanism

consists of a continuous rated
solenoid with a plunger and tripping
lever assembled to a plug-in module.
The tab on the tripping lever resets
the undervoltage release mechanism
when normal voltage has been
restored and the circuit breaker handle
is moved to the reset (OFF) position.
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

The padlockable handle lock hasp
allows the handle to be locked in the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to trip when
the handle lock holds the circuit breaker
handle in the ON position.) The hasp
mounts on the circuit breaker cover
within the trimline. The cover is
predrilled on both sides of the
operating handle so that the hasp
can be mounted on either side of the
handle. The hasp will accommodate
up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch
(6.4 mm) shackles. One per circuit
breaker. (Field installation only.)
Padlockable Handle Block
42
43
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-1
Sheet 27 013
Molded-Case Switches
Molded-Case Switches
Eaton molded-case switches (MCS)
are UL 489 devices that dont have
thermal protection, but do have a selfprotecting high-magnetic trip setting.
Molded-case switches are applied
when a compact high-capacity
disconnect device is necessary.
Accessories that can be installed in
molded-case circuit breakers are also
available for molded-case switches.
The most common application for a
molded-case switch would be as a
main disconnect for a panelboard
or a loadcenter. Available from 100 to
2500A, molded-case switches provide
a compact high-capacity disconnect
device along with the added benefits
of a molded-case circuit breaker
without the thermal protection.
It provides no overcurrent protection,
overload or low level fault. The MCS
is equipped with a high instantaneous
magnetic fixed trip unit. The fixed
magnetic trip is factory preset to
interrupt high fault currents at or
above its preset level. MCS is self
protecting within its withstand rating.
See Table 27.2-1.
Motor Circuit Protectors

Application flexibility of Eaton motor
circuit protectors (Type GMCP/HMCP/
HMCPE) is enhanced by the higher
interrupting ratings and current limiting
characteristics designed into the line.
These devices are available from
31200A in 63, 100, 150, 250, 400, 600,
800 and 1200A frame sizes.
The motor circuit protectors are
designed for application in individual
motor circuits in combination motor
starter units. Motor circuit protectors
operate on the magnetic principle with
a current sensing element in each pole
to provide short-circuit protection.
The motor circuit protector design

permits the most effective protection
possible against low-level faults while
offering circuit breaker convenience,
quick-make quick-break action,
deadfront safety and prevention
of single phasing.
The GMCP and HMCPE are 480V
devices rated between 3100A. The
HMCP is a 600V device available in five
frames and rated between 31200A.
The MCP is designed to comply with
the applicable requirements of
Underwriters Laboratories Standard
UL 489, Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2 No. 5,
and International Electrotechnical
Commission Recommendations
IEC 157-1.
An innovative design of internal

components allows higher MCP-starter
combination interrupting ratings.
The MCP is marked to permit proper
electrical application within the
assigned equipment ratings.
The MCP is a recognized component
(UL File E7819) and complies with the
applicable requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also
designed to comply with the applicable
requirements of Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2 No. 5,
and International Electrotechnical
Commission Recommendations
IEC 157-1. The interrupting rating
is defined on the assembled
equipment nameplate.
Table 27.2-1. Molded-Case Switch Short-Circuit Current Ratings at 60 Hz Only

(Maximum Fault Current at Which Device can be Applied in kAIC)
MCS
Frame
Ampere
Rating
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Short-Circuit Current Rating

240V
22
480V
600V
250 Vdc
30
GD
EHD
FD
100
100
150
65
18
65
22
14
35
18
10
10
10
HFD
JD
HJD
150
250
250
100
65
100
65
35
65
25
18
25
22
10
22
DK
KD
HKD
400
400
400
65
65
100
35
65
25
35
10
10
22
LD
HLD
MDL
600
600
800
65
100
65
35
65
50
25
35
25
22
25
22
HMDL
ND
HND
800
1200
1200
100
65
100
65
50
65
35
25
35
25
34
RD
EGK
JGK
2000
125
250
125
100
100
65
65
65
50
35
42
42
35
LGK
LGK
NGK
RGK
400
600
1200
2000
100
100
100
125
65
65
65
65
35
35
35
50
42
42
36
31
32
33
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

December 2013
Sheet 27 014
Selection DataMotor Circuit Protectors
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Motor Protection
In line with 2008 NEC 430.6(A)
circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating
selections are based on full load
currents for induction motors running
at speeds normal for belted motors
and motors with normal torque
characteristics using data taken from
NEC Table 430.250 (three-phase).
Actual motor nameplate ratings will
be used for selecting motor running
overload protection. Motors built
special for low speeds, high torque
characteristics, special starting
conditions and applications will
require other considerations as
defined in the application section
of the NEC.
These additional considerations may
require the use of a higher rated HMCP,
or at least one with higher magnetic
pickup settings.
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse
ampere rating selections are in
line with maximum rules given in
NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based
on known characteristics of Eaton
type breakers, specific units are
recommended. The current ratings
are no more than the maximum limits
set by the NEC rules for motors with
code letters F to V or without code
letters. Motors with lower code letters
will require further considerations.
34
In general, these selections were

based on:
35
1. AmbientOutside enclosure not

more than 40C (104F).
36
2. Motor startingInfrequent
starting, stopping or reversing.
37
3. Locked rotorMaximum 6 times

motor FLA.
38
39
40
41
42
43
4. Locked rotorMaximum 6 times

motor FLA.
Type HMCP motor circuit protector
may not be set more than 1300% of
the motor full-load current to comply
with NEC 430.52 (except for NEMA
Design B energy efficient motors,
which can be set up to 1700%).
Circuit breaker selections are based
on types with standard interrupting
ratings. Higher interrupting rating
types may be required to satisfy
specific system application
requirements.
Table 27.2-2. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide
Horsepower
Full Load
Amperes
(NEC) FLA
Fuse Size NEC 430.52

Maximum
Amperes
Recommended Eaton
Circuit
Breaker
Motor Circuit
Protector Type HMCP
Time Delay
Amperes
Amperes
Non-Time Delay
Adj. Range
230V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
10
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
15
15
15
20
7
15
15
30
2170
45150
45150
90300
5
7-1/2
10
15
15.2
22
28
42
30
40
50
80
50
70
90
150
30
50
60
90
30
50
50
70
90300
150500
150500
210700
20
25
30
40
54
68
80
104
100
125
150
200
175
225
250
350
100
125
150
150
100
150
150
150
3001000
4501500
4501500
7502500
50
60
75
100
130
154
192
248
250
300
350
450
400
500
600
800
200
225
300
400
150
250
400
400
7502500
12502500
20004000
20004000
125
150
200
312
360
480
600
700
1000
1000
1200
1600
500
600
700
600
600
600
18006000
18006000
18006000
460V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
6
6
6
10
6
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
7
7
7
15
2170
2170
2170
45150
5
7-1/2
10
15
7.6
11
14
21
15
20
25
40
25
35
45
70
15
25
35
45
15
30
30
50
45150
90300
90300
150500
20
25
30
40
27
34
40
52
50
60
70
100
90
110
125
175
50
70
70
100
50
70
100
100
150500
210700
3001000
3001000
50
60
75
100
65
77
96
124
125
150
175
225
200
150
300
400
110
125
150
175
150
150
150
150
4501500
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
156
180
240
300
350
450
500
600
800
225
250
350
250
400
400
12502500
20004000
20004000
575V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.9
3
6
6
10
6
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
3
7
7
7
930
2170
2170
2170
5
7-1/2
10
15
6.1
9
11
17
15
20
20
30
20
30
35
60
15
20
25
40
15
15
30
30
45150
45150
90300
90300
20
25
30
40
22
27
32
41
40
50
60
80
70
90
100
125
50
60
60
80
50
50
50
100
150500
150500
150500
3001000
50
60
75
100
52
62
77
99
100
110
150
175
175
200
250
300
100
125
150
175
100
150
150
150
3001000
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
125
144
192
225
300
350
400
450
600
200
225
300
250
250
400
12502500
12502500
20004000
For motor full load currents of 208V

and 200V, increase the corresponding
230V motor values by 10 and 15%
respectively.
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.2-3
Sheet 27 015
Selection DataCurrent Limiting Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Eaton offers one of the most complete
lines of both fusible and non-fused
current limiting breakers, and add-on
current limiting modules in the
industry. The industrial breakers are
available in current limiting versions
with interrupting capacities up to
200 kA at 480V without fuses in the
same physical size as standard and
high interrupting capacity breakers.
Eaton also manufactures both fused
and non-fused current limiting devices
200 kA at 600 Vac. See Section 27.4 for
complete selection data for current
limiting circuit breakers and add-on
current limiting modules.
The current limiting breakers use a
reverse loop stationary contact. When
current is flowing through the contacts
of these breakers, the positions of the
reverse loop and moving contact arm
induce opposing magnetic fields. The
resulting flux lines cause rapid contact
blow-apart under these conditions,
resulting in very high interrupting
capacities and provide current
limiting characteristics.
Current limiting breakers are available
from 152500A and have an interrupting
rating up to 200 kA at 480V. These
breakers are most commonly applied
when very high fault levels are available and in series rating applications
where the current limiting capability
of these breakers are used upstream
in series combinations.
Circuit breakers 600A and below that
are current limiting have frame catalog
numbers that end with the letter C.
For example, the F-Frame model that is
current limiting has a catalog number
FDC. In accordance with UL circuit
breaker marking requirements, the
nameplate on the breaker is also
labeled current limiting.
Current Limit-R BreakersNon-Fused
FCL Current Limit-R Breaker
Limit-R
The Current
molded-case
circuit breaker was developed with
interrupting ratings up to 200,000A at
480 Vac to provide complete system
protection against faults, including:
1. Overloads, by using inverse time
current tripping characteristics.
2. Low-level short-circuits, by using
instantaneous and/or short-time
delay tripping characteristics.
3. High-level short-circuits, by using
ultra high-speed, blow-apart,
current limiting contacts.
Current Limit-R circuit breakers can
be used in series with Eaton standard
molded-case circuit breakers with
listed interrupting ratings as low as
10,000A in systems capable of delivering fault currents as high as 200,000A.
The excellent current limiting properties
of Current Limit-R breakers completely
protect all Eaton downstream series
circuit breakers applied within their
voltage ratings.
The high level current-limiting action is

achieved by the use of special design,
blow-apart contacts. The opening
speed of the contacts is amplified by
the repulsion force in the slot motor to
effectively separate the contacts under
high level fault conditions in less than
one millisecond. The rapid rise of arc
voltage introduces impedance into the
system, thus limiting the amount of the
otherwise available fault current.
Current Limit-R current limiting circuit
breakers incorporate all the advantages
and features of conventional moldedcase circuit breakers. They are available
in two- and three-pole versions in
two physical frame sizes and three
continuous current frame ratings.
Type FCL has a maximum continuous
current frame rating of 100A. It is
equipped with a conventional, noninterchangeable, thermal-magnetictype trip unit with individual ampere
ratings. The Type LCL is available
with frames having maximum
continuous current ratings of either
250 or 400A. Overload and low level
short-circuit protection is provided by
a SELTRONIC electronic trip unit that
uses the individual rating plug concept
for determining the continuous
rating of the breaker. Rating plugs
are available with either fixed or
adjustable ampere ratings.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 016
Selection DataCurrent Limiting Circuit Breakers
22
TRI-PAC Fused Current Limiting Breakers
23
24
The TRI-PAC breaker offers all of the

advantages of the economical moldedcase breaker and the current limiter
is retained, while the disadvantages
of separately mounted devices
are eliminated.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
TRI-PAC breakers are available in ratings

from 151600A and have a UL listed
interrupting capacity of 200,000A
at up to 600 Vac and also have an
interrupting capacity of 100,000A
at up to 250 Vdc.
Add-on Current Limiting Modules

LA TRI-PAC Breaker
The increase in demand for electrical

power in modern commercial and
industrial buildings has resulted in
electrical services becoming substantially larger. In some low voltage
distribution systems, available shortcircuit currents can exceed 100,000
symmetrical rms amperes. Fault
currents of this intensity may exceed
the interrupting ratings of molded-case
breakers. As a result, larger expensive
circuit interrupting devices that could
withstand the thermal and magnetic
stresses associated with currents of
this value have had to be used. High
interrupting capacity current limiting
devices have been developed that
will restrict short-circuit current. If
applied correctly, they may be used in
conjunction with molded-case circuit
breakers to provide adequate and
economical protection.
The TRI-PAC breaker was developed
for this application and so named
because it affords TRIple-PACkage
protection with (1) time delay thermal
trip, (2) instantaneous magnetic trip
and (3) current limiting protection,
combined and coordinated in a compact
and economical device. These protective actions are so coordinated that
overcurrents and low magnitude faults
are cleared by the thermal action;
normal short circuits are cleared by
the magnetic action; and abnormal
short circuits, above an established
value, are cleared by the current
limiting device. Thus, unless a severe
short-circuit occurs, the current limiter
is unaffected and its replacement is
held to a minimum.
The combination of the current limiting breaker or HMCP and the current
limiter module provides the following
system protection:
Overloads, by using inverse time
current tripping characteristics of
the molded-case circuit breaker
Low-level short circuits, by using
delay tripping characteristics of the
molded-case circuit breaker
High-level short circuits, by using
ultra-high-speed, blow-apart
contacts of the current limiting
module in series with the circuit
breaker contacts. The high-level
current limiting action is achieved
by the use of special design, blowapart contacts. The opening speed
of the contacts is amplifed by the
repulsion force in the slot motor and
reverse loop stationary contact arm
to effectively separate the contacts
under high-level fault conditions in
less than 1 millisecond. The rapid
rise of arc voltage introduces
impedance into the system, thus
limiting the amount of the otherwise
available fault current
Current Limiting Add-On Modules
The current limiting breaker modules

use a reverse loop stationary contact
arm. When high short-circuit current is
flowing through the contacts of these
modules, the positions of the reverse
loop and moving contact arm induce
opposing magnetic fields. The resulting
flux lines cause rapid contact blow-apart
under fault conditions, resulting in
very high interrupting capacities and
providing current limiting characteristics. Current limiting breaker modules
in combination with select Series C
and Series G breakers, are available
with interrupting ratings up to 200 kA
at 600 Vac.
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.2-5
Sheet 27 017
Application Information100% Rated Circuit Breakers
100% Rated Circuit Breakers

100% rated circuit breakers are tested
inside a minimum size enclosure to
UL 489 for application at 100% of the
breakers continuous current rating.
100% rated circuit breakers are equipped
with electronic trip units and applied
with 90C cable rated at 75C ampacity.
To apply 100% rated breakers in
switchboards and panelboards,
additional tests are required to meet
UL 67 and UL 891. Eaton molded-case
circuit breaker frames K-, L-, N-, MDL
and R-, 702000A, can be applied at
100% of their rated continuous current
as long as the breaker is installed in its
minimum size enclosure, including
ventilation. 100% rated breakers are
applied to distribution system to provide
installation cost savings. The amount
of savings that can be realized is
dependent on the application.
Breaker
Nameplate
Example
100%
Application
enclosure
and
wire ampacity
requirements.
Figure 27.2-1. Breaker Nameplate

A 100% rated breaker receives its UL listing
based on tests conducted in a minimum
size enclosure with minimum ventilation
(if required) and minimum cable sizes,
as stated on this nameplate example.
The amount of protection designed

into a distribution system is often based
on economics. However, each project
should be furnished with a reliable
distribution system that delivers the
most effective protection possible for
each investment dollar.
Reliable and economic system design
can be usually achieved with Eatons
circuit breakers that are UL listed for
application at 100% of their ratings
instead of standard breakers that in
actual use are applied at 80% of their
frame ratings in an enclosure.
The concept between a system design
using standard breakers and that
using 100% rated breakers is
uncomplicatedbut there are no
shortcut methods for determining
which design (and devices) is the

best choice for a given system. Good
engineering practice requires a careful
system analysis beginning with the
lowest feeder and concluding with
the main device.
Also included in the system analysis
must be all present and future
factors that could affect the size
and/or quantity of the breakers and
associated hardware, such as switchboard bus, busway, cable and conduit.
Other factors to consider are loads
(continuous and noncontinuous) and
system expansions and transformers
with provisions for forced air cooling.
The NEC
The rules and intent of the National
Electrical Code governing the use of
standard or 100% rated breakers must
be understood before recommending
or applying such devices.
Section 210.20(A) Continuous and
Noncontinuous Loads of the National
Electrical Code addresses differences
between applications of standard rated
breakers and 100% rated breakers.
(Significant sections are in bold
face type.)
Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or any combination of
continuous and noncontinuous
loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not be less than
the noncontinuous load plus
125% of the continuous load.
The minimum circuit conductor
size without the application of any
ampacity adjustment or correction
factors shall have an allowable
ampacity equal to or greater than
the noncontinuous load plus
Exception: Where the assembly
including the overcurrent devices
protecting the feeder(s) are listed
for operation at 100% of their
rating, neither the ampere rating
of the overcurrent device nor the
ampacity of the feeder conductors
shall be less than the sum of
the continuous load plus the
noncontinuous load.
Note: A continuous load as defined
by NEC Article 100 is a load where
the maximum current is expected to
continue for 3 hours or more.
Standard 80% Rated Design

Noncontinuous Load +
125% of the Continuous Load
= Total Minimum Load
Special 100% Rated Design
Noncontinuous Load +
Continuous Load
= Total Minimum Load
The necessity for these NEC requirements results from circuit breaker
testing procedures.
A molded-case circuit breaker is
tested in open air to verify its nameplate ampere rating. The nameplate
specifies a value of current the circuit
breaker is rated to carry continuously
without tripping within specific
operating temperature guidelines.
In most instances, a breaker is applied
in an enclosure and performance could
be adversely affected by slow heat
dissipation and temperature rise. These
factors must be considered regarding
the ability of the breaker to comply
with its nameplate ampere rating.
Testing Conditions and Operating Conditions

There are distinct differences between
these conditions that are addressed in
NEC Section 210.20(A) by introducing
an overcurrent device and associated
hardware sizing factor. The sizing
factor ensures reliable equipment
performance under realistic conditions. Section 210.20(A) is the key to
making the best system design choice.
For feeders, Section 215.2(A)
addresses the rating of all overcurrent
devices that have been tested in open
air but are applied in an enclosure. The
thermal response of an overcurrent
device applied in an enclosure will
usually be faster than in open air,
thus dictating the 125% requirement.
The exception allows for properly tested
and listed overcurrent devices to be
applied at 100% of their nameplate rating.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Figure 27.2-2. NEC Reference

CA08104001E
Section 210.20(A) covers standard

breakers, and the exception 100%
rated breakers. NEC Section 210.20(A)
and the Section 210.20(A) exception
can be expressed by these formulas:

December 2013
Sheet 27 018
22
23
24
25
26
27
There is a Difference Between 100% Rated

Breakers and 100% Rated Assemblies
90C Wire
Special attention should be given

to the word assembly in the NEC
Exception. Normally, an assembly
is listed for 100% operation only
after being successfully tested as
an assembly per UL requirements.
The NEC allows

the breaker to be
rated at 100% of
its frame size in
an assembly,
provided that
90C wire is
applied at the
75C ampacity.
For an assembly to receive a 100%

rated UL listing, it must be tested
separately by UL project engineers.
Panelboards are tested to UL 67,
switchboards tested to UL 891.
Installing 100% rated breakers in
an assembly does not automatically
make it acceptable for a 100% rating.
28
90C Wire
29
Figure 27.2-3. Conductor Requirements
30
Table 27.2-3. The ApplicationThese Examples Illustrate the Cost Savings when the 100% Rated Approach is Used
A visual comparison of breaker, bus and cable sizes in the Three-Phase Distribution System
examples (line diagrams) reveals how a 100% rated system design can provide cost savings.
31
Load
Continuous
400A
32
Noncontinuous
200A
33
34
35
36
Feeder #1
Feeder #2
Feeder #3
Main
Description
800A
1200A
1000
1200A
Three-phase distribution
System line diagrams
Selection of either a 100% rated design or standard design must result from a system analysis beginning with the lowest feeder and concluding with
the systems main device. For these system examples, assume that all assembly testing has been successfully completed and either the 100% rated
design or standard design can be selected. Each system is hypothetical and either approach will meet safety requirements. Loads were arbitrarily
selected. The load table includes the calculations for minimum total loads in conformance with NEC Section 210.20(A).
Table 27.2-4. Standard 80% Rated Design

Noncontinuous Load + 125% of the Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load
Line Diagram
Description
Feeder No. 1
Feeder No. 2
Feeder No. 3
Main
Calculation
per NEC
of minimum
total load
200 + (1.25) (400)

=700A
0 + (1.25) (800)
=1000A
600 + 0 = 600A
2250A
Breaker
frame (F)
trip (T)
rating
(F) (T)
800A /700A
(F) (T)
1200A /1000A
(F) (T)
600A/600A
(F) (T)
2500A /2500A
Bus/cable
rating
800A
1000A
600A
2500A
2500A F
2500A T
2500A Bus
37
38
2500 kcmil,
Cu per phase
39
MCC 800A Bus

3400 kcmil,
Cu per phase
2350 kcmil,
Cu per phase
Pnlbd. 600A Bus
1000A Busway
40
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
#1
#2
#3
1200A F
600A F
800A F
1000A T
600A T
700A T
(Noncontinuous Load) + (125%) (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 210.20(A).

Nearest standard size, not less than calculated value.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-7
Sheet 27 019

Table 27.2-5. Standard 100% Rated Design
Noncontinuous Load + Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load
22
Line Diagram
Description
Feeder No. 1
Feeder No. 2
Feeder No. 3
Main
Calculation
per NEC
of minimum
total load
200 + 400 = 600A
0 + 800 = 800A
600 + 0 = 600A
2000A
23
2000A F
2000A T
24
2000A Bus
Breaker
frame (F)
trip (T)
rating
(F) (T)
600A/600A
(F) (T)
800A/800A
(F) (T)
600A/600A
(F) (T)
2000A/2000A
Bus/cable
rating
600A
800A
600A
2000A
600A F
600A T
Feeder
Feeder
Feeder
#1
#2
#3
800A F
600A F
800A T
600A T
2350 kcmil,
Cu per phase
MCC 600A Bus

2600 kcmil,
Cu per phase
2350 kcmil,
Cu per phase
Pnlbd. 600A Bus
800A Busway

(Noncontinuous Load) + (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 210.20(A) Exception.

Sum of all NEC calculated minimum feeder loads.
25
26
27
28
Table 27.2-6. The ResultSavings in Both Switchboard and Cable Costs

Design
Minimum Total Load

(Amperes)
Potential System
Savings
Standard
700
1000
100% rated
600
800
Results
The standard design

requires higher rated,
more expensive breaker
and bus. Although the
minimum total load is
700A, most breakers and
hardware are available
only in standard sizes
requiring even more
expensive nearest
standard size breakers
and hardware.
Dramatic economic
advantages are
achieved by using
the 100% rated
design. Substantial
savings result from
using an 800A
busway and significant savings are
also provided by
the smaller breaker
frame and cable size.
600
2250
600
2000
29
100% rated breaker systems

can potentially represent
significant economic
Calculations indicate The 100% approach results advantages:
either approach
in the same frame size
In lower rated and sized
results in the same
breaker with a savings in
breakers, less cable and
size breaker and hard- conductor material cost.
significant reductions in
ware. A 100% rated
Additionally, Eaton offers a equipment floor and wall
breaker would be
2000A frame 100%-rated
space. These savings can be
more expensive
breaker, which is less
realized when the results of
although the final
expensive than the 2500A a systems analysis favor the
decision could rest
frame 80%-rated.
100% rated design approach.
on whether or not
future load growth
is anticipated.
30
Rating
at 480V
35
31
32
33
34
Table 27.2-7. Available 100% Rated Circuit Breakers

Frames
Trip
Units
JG-Frame 50/100/250A
Minimum enclosure size
26.00 x 18.00 x 8.00 in (660.4 x 457.2 x 203.2 mm)
JGE-C 25 kA
JGS-C 35 kA
JGH-C 65 kA
JGC-C 100 kA
Thermal-magnetic, Digitrip 310+
K-Frame 125/250/400A
Minimum enclosure size
24.00 x 15.00 x 6.00 in (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)
CKD 35 kA
CHKD 65 kA
Digitrip 310+ (125A, 250A and 400A)
37
LG-Frame 250/400/600A
Minimum enclosure size with ventilation
28.00 x 19.00 x 8.00 in (711.2 x 482.6 x 203.2 mm)
LGE-C 35 kA
LGS-C 50 kA
LGH-C 65 kA
Thermal-magnetic, Digitrip 310+
38
L-Frame 125/250/400/600A
24.00 x 15.00 x 6.00 in (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm)
CLD 35 kA
CHLD 65 kA
CLDC 100 kA
Digitrip 310, Digitrip OPTIM
39
Digitrip 310
40
M-Frame 800A
42.00 x 18.00 x 7.50 in (1066.8 x 457.2 x 190.5 mm)
CMDL 50 kA
CHMDL 65 kA
N-Frame 800/1200A
42.00 x 22.75 x 11.50 in (1066.8 x 577.9 x 292.1 mm)
CND 50 kA
CHND 65 kA
CNDC 100 kA
Digitrip 310, Digitrip OPTIM
R-Frame 1600/2000A
21.50 x 18.00 x 13.00 in (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm)
CRD 65 kA
CRDC 100 kA
Digitrip 310/510/610/810/910, Digitrip OPTIM

Thermal-magnetic LG requires venting 7.00 square inches above and 7.00 square inches below on the front face of enclosure.
Use with 9.00-inch (228.6 mm) tee connector.
CA08104001E
36
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 020
Application InformationSeries Rated Systems
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Series Rated Systems

Series rating is a short-circuit
interrupting rating assigned to a
combination of two or more overcurrent devices connected in series.
The short-circuit interrupting rating
of the upstream device must be equal
to or greater than the available fault
current. Downstream breakers,
however, are not fully rated for the
systems available fault current. Series
combinations must be tested to
UL 489. Series ratings are applied to
distribution systems where shortcircuit coordination is not required.
The Eaton listing of available series
rating combinations are shown in the
applications section of this document.
Under most circumstances, selection
of a series rated system will reduce
initial cost and size, because downstream breakers are not fully rated
for the prospective short-circuit fault
current at their point of application.
The interrupting rating of the
upstream breaker must always be
equal to or greater than the available
fault current at its line terminals. In
addition, downstream breakers must
have been tested in combination with
the upstream breaker and shown to be
protected by the upstream breaker at
the assigned series rated interrupting
rating. The net result is that the system
can be assigned a series rated or
integrated rating higher than the
rating of the downstream breaker when
it is tested or applied alone. Design of
the system and selection of breakers is
based on short-circuit interruption test
specified and witnessed by UL.
42
43
Confirm, during installation, that the

correct breakers have been selected
by checking the nameplates appearing
on the end-use equipment
Evaluating the Protection Systems

Designed properly, series rated and
fully rated systems protect electrical
equipment with equal effectiveness.
But initial cost and continuity of service
can vary widely depending on the
inherent characteristics of the system,
and on the design philosophy adopted.
Fully Rated System

All breakers are rated for full fault
current at their point of application in
accordance with the National Electrical
Code. The continuity of service provided by the system is greater than a
series rated system.
Series Rated System

A series rated system is less costly
than a fully rated system. The
upstream breaker is always fully rated,
but the interrupting ratings of downstream breakers are normally lower.
Service continuity can be acceptable
after initial startup, because the lowerlevel arcing faults most likely occur
after that time can be cleared by the
downstream breaker alone. However,
under high fault conditions, both the
upstream and downstream breakers
would open, eliminating service to
the affected portion of the system.
Therefore, it is not possible to achieve
selective coordination for all magnitudes of available fault current with
a series rated system.
National Electrical Code Requirements
Because of their blow-open design,

most molded-case circuit breakers are
current limiting to some degree. In a
series rated application and in the event
of a major fault, both upstream and
downstream breakers open, protecting
the lower-rated downstream devices
by limiting the let-through current.
Requirements of the National Electrical

Code for short-circuit ratings may now
be met by equipment that is marked
with ratings adequate for the available
fault current at their point of application
in the electrical system. Refer to the
current NEC for specific requirements.
To develop a series rated protective

system, it is suggested that the
design engineer, after completing
preliminary steps:
Available Short-Circuit Current.

Service equipment must be suitable
for the short-circuit current available
at its supply terminal.
Define available fault current at

the line side terminals of the
upstream breaker
Select an upstream breaker with an
interrupting rating equal to or greater
than the available fault current
Verify the series tested interrupting
ratings of the selected combination
of breakers by referring to the tables
in this section
Approval. The conductors and equipment

required or permitted by the Code will
be acceptable only if approved. See
Examination of Equipment for Safety
and Examination, Identification,
Installation and Use of Equipment.
See definitions of Approved,
Identified, Labeled and Listed.
41
General Discussion
Examination, Identification, Installation

and Use of Equipment
1. Examination: in judging equipment, considerations such as the
following should be evaluated.
a. Suitability for installation
and use in conformity with
the provisions of this Code.
Suitability of equipment use
may be identified by a description marked on or provided
with a product to identify the
suitability of the product for a
specific purpose, environment
or application. Suitability of
equipment may be evidenced
by listing or labeling.
b. Mechanical strength and
durability, including, for parts
designed to enclose and protect
other equipment, the adequacy
of the protection thus provided.
c. Wire-ending and
connection space.
d. Electrical insulation.
e. Heating effects under normal
conditions of use and also
under abnormal conditions
likely to arise in service.
f. Arcing effects.
g. Classification by type, size,
voltage, current capacity
and specific use.
h. Other factors that contribute to
the practical safeguarding of
persons using or likely to come
in contact with the equipment.
2. Installation and use: listed or
labeled equipment must be used
or installed in accordance with
any instructions included in the
listing or labeling.
Interrupting Rating
Equipment intended to break current at
fault levels must have an interrupting
rating sufficient for the system voltage
and the current that is available at the
terminals of the equipment. Equipment
intended to break current at other than
fault levels must have an interrupting
rating at system voltage sufficient for
the current that must be interrupted.
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-9
Sheet 27 021
Application InformationSeries Rated System

Circuit Impedance and Other
Characteristics
The overcurrent protective devices,
the total impedance, the component
short-circuit withstanding ratings, and
other characteristics of the circuit to
be protected should be so selected
and coordinated as to permit the
circuit protective devices used to
clear a fault without the occurrence
of extensive damage to the electrical
components of the circuit. This fault
will be assumed to be either two or
more of the circuit conductors, or
between any circuit conductor and
the grounding conductor or enclosing
metal raceway.
Motor Contribution
The fault current contribution of
motors connected between series
rated breakers must be considered.
Article 240.86(C) in the 2005 edition of
the National Electrical Code states that
for series ratings the sum of the motor,
full-load currents cannot exceed 1%
of the interrupting rating of the lowerrated circuit breaker. The actual fault
current contribution from induction
motors is about four times their fullload current (impedance value of
25%). For example, if the downstream
branch circuit breakers used in a series
rated combination have an interrupting
rating of 14,000A rms symmetrical for a
480V system, the maximum full-load
current of motors connected to that
panel from the branch circuit breakers
is 140A (1%). For typical induction
motors, this is equivalent to a total
horsepower at 480V of approximately
115 horsepower.
Design/Test Considerations for Series

Coordinated Circuit Breakers
Test procedures for all Eaton moldedcase circuit breakers intended for
application in series connected
systems are in full compliance with
all applicable paragraphs of the latest
edition of UL 489.
Note: For further information, see IEEE
Standards 141, 242 and 446.
The entire system is tested because

such tests are the only way to correctly
verify the performance of overcurrent
devices under short-circuit conditions.
Calibration, interruption, trip-out
and dielectric withstand tests are
performed. Breakers in their asreceived condition are used for
the interrupting and intermediate
interrupting capability tests. If agreeable to concerned parties, previously
tested samples may be used. The
interrupting rating of the line-side
circuit breaker is equal to or greater
than the maximum available fault
current on the distribution system at
its point of intended application.
Tests comply also with the intent of
the proposed revisions to applicable
IEC documents.
Tests are completed in a well-defined
sequence:
Interrupting tests
Intermediate interrupting tests
Trip-out tests
Dielectric voltage-withstand tests
Eatons Series C circuit breakers

intended for application in series rated
systems are subjected, in the following
sequence, to interrupting ability, intermediate interrupting ability, trip-out,
and dielectric voltage-withstand tests.
During testing of the series rated circuit
breakers, each breaker is mounted in
the smallest enclosure in which it is
to be used; openings in the enclosure
do not exceed 10% of its total external
area, and there are no openings
directly opposite a vent in a circuit
breaker case. The two enclosures are
connected by a 12-inch (304.8 mm)
conduit of any diameter. Each lead
from test terminals to the line-side
breaker is less than 4 feet (1.2m) per
breaker, and each load shorting the
load-side breaker(s) is sized based on
the rating of the load-side breaker. The
combined length of the lead from the
line-side overcurrent protective device
of the load-side breaker and from the
load-side breaker to the shorting point,
is less than 4 feet (1.2m) per pole.
Exception: the breakers may be

mounted in the end-use equipment
that will contain them and is marked
for use with the series combination.
The load-side breaker is positioned
as close as possible to the line-side
breaker(s). Line and load leads are
less than 4 feet (1.2m).
A fuse is connected between the
enclosure and line terminal of the
pole least likely to arc to the enclosure,
or the neutral, if the breaker is rated
120/240 or 480Y/277 Vac. The connection to the load-side of the limiting
impedance is #10 AWG copper wire
less than 6 feet (1.8m) long. The fuse is
a 30A non-renewable type acceptable
for branch circuit protection; its voltage
rating is not less than the rating of the
device, and its interrupting rating is
not less than the available current.
1. Interrupting tests:
a. The test circuit is closed on
the series combination with
all breakers fully closed; and
b. The load-side breaker is closed
on the circuit while the line-side
breaker is fully closed.
Note: Random closing is used in all threephase tests. When the circuit is closed on
the combination, closing is controlled in
single-phase tests so that closing occurs
within 10 electrical degrees of the zero-point
of the supply voltage wave.
2. Intermediate interrupting tests at

the specified available current and
maximum voltage. Procedures
are identical to those described
in 1a and 1b (above) but at the
maximum current level that
causes the load-side breaker to
open, but not the line-side breaker.
If the line-side breaker is currentlimiting, the series combination
should be evaluated in the region
below its current-limiting threshold. (There is no need for these
tests if the current is less than
the interrupting rating on the
load-side breaker.)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3. Trip-out tests of the load-side

breaker at 250% of the marked
ampere rating.
40
4. Dielectric voltage-withstand
tests verify that the breaker can
withstand, without breakdown,
a 60 (4862) Hz essentially
sinusoidal potential for 1 minute.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 022
Application InformationSeries Connected Ratings
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Series Connected Ratings:

Eaton Circuit Breakers
A wide range of breakers and combinations in the Eaton line is available
that has been tested in accordance
with UL procedures for series
connected ratings: individually
enclosed breakers in series with main
lug panelboards, main breakers integral
with branch breakers in panelboards,
in switchboards, and in meter centers.
You can rely on the enclosed data
for applications with other undefined
distribution equipment where series
application ratings can be an advantage.
Circuit breaker/circuit breaker series
rated combinations are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories in their
Component Directory (Yellow Book)
under Circuit BreakersSeries
Connected.
The series combinations shown in
the UL Yellow Book are UL recognized
component ratings only. Consult
the equipment manufacturer for
applicable UL recognized assembly
combinations.
Specific series ratings tested combinations in assemblies can be found in
Tab 22 for panelboards/switchboards.
Both circuit-breaker-to-circuit-breaker
and fuse-to-circuit-breaker upstream/
downstream series rating tables are
provided. The assemblies series
ratings tables are also on the Eaton
Web site (www.eaton.com). Search for
document 1C96944H02 Panelboard
and Switchboards Series Ratings
Information Manual.
Circuit Breaker Identification

Marking of all Eatons circuit breakers
is clear for easy identification of type,
rating and operating status. Nameplates are color-coded for immediate
identification of rating, and a colorcoded bar identifies the type and
interrupting rating at common
application voltages. Operating status is
indicated clearly by the position of the
handle and color-coded flags. On and
off positions are identified by English
words and international symbols.
Scientists and engineers at the Eaton
Testing Laboratory ensure that Eaton
circuit breakers are the most reliable
and develop new concepts and
improvements in breaker design.
Designs and reliability are verified,
and products are improved continuously and qualified to meet UL, NEMA
and other standards. In addition,
engineers from any breaker or
panelboard manufacturer can work
along-side their peers from Eaton to
test their products in the lab.
Example: Assume a specific type of

current-limiting fuse rated 2000A.
Then using the following figure:
1. Draw a vertical line from the
prospective short-circuit current
of 200 kA to intersect the typical
peak let-through curve at A.
The consolidated nameplate on all

breakers provides complete identification and rating information in a format
that is easy to read and understand.
2. Draw a horizontal line left

from Point A to intersect the
prospective peak curve at B.
The interrupting rating of the series

combination is never permitted to be
marked on the downstream breaker.
However, the series rating may be
marked on panelboards in which the
combination has been tested and
listed if:
3. Drop a vertical line from B to

intersect the horizontal axis and
read the recommended rating,
65 kA rms, concluding that a circuit
breaker with a 65 kA interrupting
capacity will be protected by
a specified 2000A currentlimiting fuse.
The upstream breaker is installed in

the panelboard as a main breaker
The panelboard is a main-lug-only
type and is specifically marked to
indicate the type and rating of the
upstream listed series tested breaker
that must be applied with the
panelboard
This conclusion is wrong when the

downstream service has a blow-open
contact assembly, as does a moldedcase circuit breaker or similar device.
It may be valid when the currentlimiting fuse is sized to protect a
passive bus bar system.
Marking of Panelboards
Marking of panelboards conforms to
the latest edition of UL 67. Markings
are clear and understandable, and
include the short-circuit rating in rms
amperes; maximum voltage rating for
each short-circuit rating; a statement
indicating that additional or replacement devices shall be of the same type
and of equal or greater interrupting
capacity; and, when applicable, the
identity of combinations of integral
and branch circuit overcurrent devices
that are required when applying the
marked short-circuit current rating.
The reason: The up-over-down method

ignores dynamic impedance (the inherent
current-limiting of the downstream
molded-case circuit breaker). Such
impedance is developed directly by the
forces of the let-through current created
when the contacts are blown open.
For proper application of currentlimiting fuses, always refer to recommendations by the manufacturer of
the circuit breaker, which are based
on actual test data.
Up-over-down method.
Fuses
Fuses can be used instead of circuit
breakers in fully rated, selectively
coordinated and series connected
protection systems. Specific series
ratings tested combinations in
assemblies can be found in Tab 22
for panelboards.
Dont apply fuses using the up-overdown method that has been recommended by some fuse manufacturers
for sizing a current-limiting fuse that
protects a downstream molded-case
circuit breaker with a specified rms
symmetrical interrupting rating. The
method can lead to erroneous and unsafe
conclusions, and should not be used.
Asymmetrical
Prospective
Peak Curve
at 15%
Power
Factor
460,000
Prospective Peak Let-Through
Current in Amperes
22
150,000
A
2000A
Current
Limiter
Fuse Curve
65,000
200,000
Prospective Short-Circuit rms Amperes
Do Not Use This Method
Figure 27.2-4. Up-Over-Down Misapplication
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.2-11
Sheet 27 023
Application InformationSeries Connected Ratings

Series Ratings Selected Under
Engineering Supervision
22
The 2005 NEC introduced a new

provision allowing a licensed
professional engineer to select a
series combination of overcurrent
devices for existing installations. This
represents a major change from the
previous requirements that series
rated combinations must be proven
by actual testing, and witnessed and
listed by a third-party certification
agency. A calculated evaluation of
a series rated system is extremely
difficult, if not impossible, to
determine because of the dynamic
impedance of the downstream
breakers as described above.
Compatibility of devices could only
be determined if it is guaranteed that
the downstream device(s) do not even
begin to open during the complete
interruption time of the upstream
device. Another factor is that the letthrough current must not exceed the
interrupting rating of the downstream
device. These are just a couple of the
many difficult factors that must be
verified to ensure the safe application
of an engineered series rated
combination.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 024
High Selective Coordination Breaker
22
High Instantaneous Breakers for

Selective Coordination
23
24
25
26
27
28
High Instantaneous Breaker
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Eaton introduces the LHH thermalmagnetic and NHH electronic trip

molded-case circuit breakers capable
of providing higher current levels of
selective coordination. These circuit
breakers are based on Eaton industryleading Series G L-Frame and
Series C N-Frame high performance
circuit breaker frames. The LHH and
NHH circuit breakers are available
with trip units having 125400A rating.
The LHH and NHH circuit breakers

incorporate a higher level of magnetic
pickup and electronic instantaneous
setting respectively, thus allowing
for higher current levels of selective
coordination. Standard molded-case
circuit breakers typically are furnished
with a magnetic pickup or electronic
instantaneous adjustment or instantaneous override set at 10 times (10X)
the trip rating. Eatons LHH and NHH
molded-case circuit breakers are
furnished with a higher level of
magnetic pickup (up to 26x) or
electronic instantaneous available
maximum settings. These higher
levels of magnetic pickup (up to 93x)
and electronic instantaneous values
in turn allow the system designer to
obtain selective coordination at fault
current levels up to these higher
ratings. This allows the line side LHH
or NHH circuit breakers to selectively
coordinate up to the values for available fault current values determined
at the load side circuit breaker. When
the line side and load side moldedcase circuit breaker trip ratings are
chosen to coordinate in the overload
range, they also can be selectively
coordinated in the fault range. For
overcurrents protected by circuit
breakers on the load side of the LHH
or NHH, only the effected load side
circuit breaker will open, while the
line side LHH and/or NHH circuit
breakers remain closed, thus providing continuity of power to the other
critical loads supplied by the LHH
and NHH circuit breakers. See
Page 27.3-15 for LHH and NHH
breaker selection data.
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
JG, LG MCCBs Shown with Ground

Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
Eaton earth leakage breakers offer

Class 1 ground fault protection and
improved ground fault coordination
capability. A Class 1 device can open
at high levels of fault current, while a
Class 2 device prevents opening
beyond the contact rating of its
interrupting device.
Earth leakage breakers are factory
supplied with a single sensor and
ground fault relay built-in. The ground
fault pick-up setting is adjustable
from 0.03 to 30A in eight steps, and
the ground fault time delay setting
is adjustable from instantaneous to
2.0 seconds. See Page 27.4-44 for
earth leakage circuit breaker
selection data.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

27.2-13
Sheet 27 025
AFCI Circuit Breakers
AFCI Circuit Breakers

An arc-fault circuit interrupter is a
device intended to provide protection
from the effects of arc faults by recognizing characteristics unique to arcing
and by functioning to de-energize the
circuit when an arc fault is detected.
Eaton offers 120 Vac AFCI single-pole,
15 and 20A breakers, plug-in and
bolt-on, to meet Article 210.12 of
the 2008 NEC.
There are currently two types of AFCI
circuit breakers on the market today.
The types are clearly defined by
UL 1699. These are the branch feeder
Type AFCI and the Combination Type
AFCI. The dual-purpose AFCI is yet
another feature available on the
market that is achieved by simply
adding 5 mA personnel ground fault
protection to the existing AFCI.
The AFCI circuit breaker is the most
tested residential circuit breaker on
the market. In the case of series arc
detection, these arcs are detected
when equipment is operating thus
drawing current. Parallel arcs can
occur and are detected even if the
load is not operating. When thresholds
of monitoring are exceeded, the
electronics within this device work to
identify safe arcs from hazardous arcs.
The combination type AFCI is now set

to begin its application as of January
1, 2008. Another change included the
location of the combination AFCI that
allows it to be within 6 feet of the
loadcenter with qualifications.
There are a few sections in the NEC

that in some way reference the AFCI
technology. NEC Section 210.12 is the
heart of the requirement for the Arc
Fault Technology. The introduction
of the AFCI product to the National
Electrical Code occurred in 1999.
The verbiage of this code included a
start date of enforcement effective
January 1, 2002. The 2002 NEC made
a slight change to remove the word
receptacle to ensure that the AFCI
was to be applied on all circuits supplying the bedroom and not just those
circuits supplying receptacle outlets.
The 2005 NEC introduced some
changes that include the introduction
of the combination type AFCI.
The 2008 National Electrical Code

expanded the application of AFCI
outside of the bedroom circuits to
include family rooms, closets, parlors,
dens, hallways, sunrooms, living
rooms and dining rooms. The 6-foot
rule was also removed and further
clarified the requirements around
using a receptacle combination type
AFCI were expanded upon.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
AFCI Test Button
Latch Lever
AFCI Detection Circuit
Load Terminal
Load Neutral
Terminal
29
30
31
32
Line Connection
Contacts
Trip Mechanism
Pigtail
Connection to
Loadcenter
Figure 27.2-5. AFCI Circuit Breaker

Table 27.2-8. NEC Specifications
Article
Description
210.4
Article 210Branch Circuits

Multiwire Branch Circuits
210.12
Article 210Branch Circuits

Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI)
440.65
Article 440Air-Conditioning and Refrigerating Equipment

Leakage-Current Detector-Interrupter (LCDI) and Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI)
550.25
Article 550Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, and Mobile Home Parks

Arc-Fault Interrupter Protection
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 026
Application InformationDC Circuit Breakers
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
DC Rated Breakers
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Breakers are available for use with

ungrounded applications where all
three poles are connected in series,
and grounded applications where the
load is connected to the grounded
terminal, and the series connected
poles are on the non-grounded
terminal. Rated for up to 750 Vdc,
breakers are available from 15 to
2500A trip ranges with thermalmagnetic trip units. Their compact
size and increased interrupting
performance give Eaton the most
complete range of DC breakers in
the industry.
Table 27.2-9. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
DC Circuit Breakers
UL listed Eaton DC molded-case circuit
breakers are for use in general DC
circuits, battery supply circuits of UPS
systems, PV systems and Level 3
electric vehicle charging circuits. These
devices are an excellent alternative to
fuses because they are easier to install
and require less maintenance.
The various DC voltage ratings are
obtained by connecting one, two,
three or four poles in series as noted.
Connection diagrams are shown on the
breaker nameplate. The DC breakers
use the same internal and external
accessories as the standard breakers
for AC application. DC breakers up to
600 Vdc are UL 489 listed and exceed
the requirements of UL Supplement SC
for molded-case circuit breakers with
uninterruptible power supplies.
Molded-case circuit breakers for
transportation application requiring
750 Vdc are available 15150A with
42 kA interrupting capacity at 750 Vdc.
Breakers require four poles in series for
high fault current protection in 750 Vdc
application. For 750V applications with
low fault current requirements, contact
Eaton for three-pole frames and rating
details. 750V is not a UL rating.
Dimensions for DC breakers are
the same as the standard thermalmagnetic equivalent.
DC molded-case circuit breakers use
standard thermal-magnetic trip units,
which are calibrated on AC circuits.
The use of standard trip units allows
for easy interchangeability and
inventory management when both
AC and DC systems are used. The
magnetic trip pickup on DC circuits
are, on average, 42% higher than AC.
Specific time current curves depicting
the values or tolerance band increase
for DC breakers are available. Refer
to publication TC01215003E for
curve information.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Frame
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA)

Volts DC
125
250
600
750
HFDDC
225
42
50
42
42
JGEDC
JGSDC
JGHDC
250
250
250
35
42
50
35
42
50
35
50
65
HJDDC
HKDDC
250
400
42
42
50
50
42
42
LGEDC
LGSDC
LGHDC
600
600
600
22
22
42
22
22
42
35
50
65
HLDDC
HLDDC
HMDLDC
600
1200
800
42
42
42
50
50
50
35
35
NBDC
PBDC
1200
2500
42
42
50
65
50
65

DC ratings apply to substantially noninductive circuits. Time constant per UL 489.

Minimum DC application voltage is 48 Vdc.
Single-pole in series.
Two poles in series.

Three poles in series.

Four poles in series. Not a UL listed
voltage rating.
Four-pole frame with two-pole connection
in parallel.
Table 27.2-10. DC Breaker DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Frame
Number
of Poles
HFDDC
1
2
3
4
Width
Height
1.38 (35.1)
2.75 (70.0)
4.13 (105.0)
5.50 (139.7)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
6.00 (152.4)
Depth
3.38 (86.0)
3.38 (86.0)
3.38 (86.0)
3.38 (86.0)
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC
4.13 (105.0)
7.00 (177.8)
3.57 (90.7)
HJDDC
HKDDC
2, 3
2, 3
4.13 (105.0)
5.50 (139.7)
10.00 (254.0)
10.13 (257.3)
4.06 (103.1)
4.10 (104.1)
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC
5.48 (139.2)
10.13 (257.3)
4.09 (103.9)
HLDDC
2, 3
4
8.25 (209.6)
11.00 (279.4)
10.75 (273.1)
10.75 (273.1)
4.06 (103.1)
4.06 (103.1)
HMDLDC
NBDC
PBDC
2, 3
3
3
8.25 (209.6)
8.25 (209.6)
12.06 (306.3)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
22.06 (560.3)
4.06 (103.1)
5.50 (139.7)
9.06 (230.1)
DC Molded-Case Switches
Eatons DC molded-case switches
are used in applications requiring a
compact, high-capacity disconnect.
They are UL 489 listed and have
automatic high instantaneous current

protection. These devices do not
provide overload protection.
Table 27.2-11. DC Molded-Case Switches

Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40C
Interrupting
Capacity (kA)
Poles in
Series
With Line and

Load Terminals
Catalog Number
Without Line and

Load Terminals
Catalog Number
100
150
225
42
42
42
3
3
3
HFDDC3100KL
HFDDC3150KL
HFDDC3225KL
HFDDC3100KW
HFDDC3150KW
HFDDC3225KW
250
400
400
42
35
65
3
3
3
HJDDC3250K
HKDDC3400K
LGKDC3400KSG
HJDDC3250KW
HKDDC3400KW
LGKDC3400KSW
600
600
800
65
35
35
3
3
3
LGKDC3630KSG
HLDDC3600K
HMDLDC3800K
LGKDC3630KSW
HLDDC3600WK
HMDLDC3800WK
50
HLDDC21200K
HLDDC21200WK
600 Vdc Maximum
250 Vdc Maximum

1200

Minimum DC application voltage is 48 Vdc.

Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel.
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-15
Sheet 27 027
Application InformationDC Circuit Breakers

Table 27.2-12. Typical DC System Applications
Description
250 Vdc Maximum
600 Vdc Maximum
750 Vdc Maximum
Grounded
Grounded
Grounded
Switchgear batteries
Telecom
Ungrounded
Ungrounded
22
Ungrounded
23
Solar photovoltaic
UPS battery systems
24
Traction/transportation systems
25
Electrical vehicle charging
DC motors
26
Wiring Diagrams
27
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application

Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.
28
29
30
31
Load
Load
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems,
or grounded systems that have one end of
load (A) connected to grounded terminal,
opposite poles in series connection.
(A)

Load
(A)

32
33
34
Load
35
36
Load
Load
Suitable for use on ungrounded
systems only.
Figure 27.2-6. 250 Vdc Maximum

Two Poles in Series
Suitable for use on

ungrounded systems only.

Three Poles in Series
Suitable for use on ungrounded

systems only.

Four Poles in Series
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 028
Application Information400415 Hz
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Application of Eaton MoldedCase Circuit Breakers to

400415 Hz Systems
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers,
including breakers with electronic trip
units, can be applied for overcurrent
protection on 400415 Hz systems.
Commonly used to power computer
installations, 400415 Hz systems
are also employed in conjunction
with certain aircraft, military and other
specialty equipment.
Table 27.2-13. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers

Breaker Frame
Series
EG
This publication contains guidelines

to applying Eaton molded-case circuit
breakers on 400415 Hz systems.
Circuit Breaker Derating Required

Table 27.2-13 lists the maximum
continuous current carrying capacity
and Table 27.2-14 lists the interrupting
capacities at 400415 Hz of Eaton
molded-case circuit breakers. Due to
the increased resistance of the copper
sections resulting from the skin effect
produced by eddy currents at 400
415 Hz, circuit breakers in many cases
require derating.
The thermal derating on these devices
is based upon 100%, three-phase
application in open air in a maximum
of 40C (104F) with 4 feet (1.2m) of
the specified cable 75C (167F) of bus
at the line and load side. Additional
derating of not less than 20% will be
required if the circuit breaker is to be
used in an enclosure. Further derating
may be required if the enclosure
contains other heat generating
devices or if the ambient temperatures
exceed 40C.
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD
JG
JDB, JD, HJD
37
38
39

Maximum
Continuous
Amperes at 60 Hz
400415 Hz Application
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Cable/
Bus Bar
(Per Phase)
Terminals
(Fixed Front)
Catalog or
Style Number
15
20
25
15
20
25
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
30
35
40
30
35
40
1#10 Cu
1#10 Cu
1#8 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
45
50
60
45
50
60
1#8 Cu
1#6 Cu
1#6 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
80
90
100
70
80
90
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
1#1 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
3T125EF
110
125
100
110
1-1/0 Cu
1-1/0 Cu
3T125EF
3T125EF
15
20
25
15
20
25
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
1#12 Cu
624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02
30
35
40
30
35
40
1#10 Cu
1#10 Cu
1#8 Cu
624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02
50
70
90
45
65
85
1#6 Cu
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
624B100G02
624B100G02
624B100G02
100
125
150
95
115
135
1#1 Cu
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
624B100G17
624B100G17
624B100G17
70
90
100
60
80
90
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
1#1 Cu
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
125
150
175
100
125
150
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
12/0 Cu
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
200
200
225
250
160
175
200
200
13/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
1250 kcmil Cu
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
T250FJ
70
90
100
60
80
90
1#4 Cu
1#2 Cu
1#1 Cu
T250KB
T250KB
T250KB
125
150
175
100
125
150
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
12/0 Cu
T250KB
T250KB
T250KB
200
225
250
160
200
200
13/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
1250 kcmil Cu
T250KB
T250KB
T250KB
The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the
same as at 60 Hz.
Thermal-magnetic only.
FD and HFD only.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-17
Sheet 27 029
Cable and Bus Sizing
Table 27.2-13. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers (Continued)

Breaker Frame
Series
KDB, KD, HKD
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes at 60 Hz
400415 Hz Application
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Cable/
Bus Bar
(Per Phase)
Terminals
(Fixed Front)
Catalog or
Style Number
125
150
175
100
125
150
11/0 Cu
11/0 Cu
12/0 Cu
T300K
T300K
T300K
200
225
250
160
180
200
13/0 Cu
14/0 Cu
1250 kcmil Cu
T300K
T300K
T300K
300
350
400
225
275
300
1350 kcmil Cu
1500 kcmil Cu
23/0 Cu
T300K
T350K
T400K
250
300
350
200
250
275
1250 kcmil Cu
1350 kcmil Cu
1500 kcmil Cu
TA350LK
TA350LK
TA350LK
400
500
600
300
400
400
1500 kcmil Cu
2500 kcmil Cu
2500 kcmil Cu
TA350LK
3TA632LK
3TA632LK
250
300
350
210
240
275
1250 kcmil Cu
1350 kcmil Cu
1500 kcmil Cu
T600LA
T600LA
T600LA
400
500
600
310
370
425
2250 kcmil Cu
2350 kcmil Cu
2500 kcmil Cu
T600LA
T600LA
T600LA
LD with Digitrip RMS 310
300
600
300
500
2250 kcmil Cu
2350 kcmil Cu
T401LA
T401LA
MDL with Digitrip RMS 310
400
500
600
340
405
470
23/0 Cu
2300 kcmil Cu
2350 kcmil Cu
T600MA1
T600MA1
T600MA1
700
800
355
400
24/0 Cu
2300 kcmil Cu
T800MA1
T800MA1
ND with Digitrip RMS 310
1200
700
750
850
3300 kcmil Cu
3350 kcmil Cu
4350 kcmil Cu
T1000NBI
T1000NBI
T1200NBI
RD with Digitrip RMS 310
2000
1500
41/2 x 4 Cu
Rear connected
Cu T-bar
LG
LDB, LD, HLD

The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the
same as at 60 Hz.
Thermal-magnetic only.
The cable and bus sizes to be used at

400415 Hz are not based on standard
National Electrical Code tables for 60 Hz
application. Larger cross sections are
necessary at 400415 Hz to avoid
exceeding component temperature
limits. All bus bars specified are based
upon mounting the bars in the vertical
plane to allow maximum air flow. All
bus bars are spaced at a minimum of
1/4-inch (6.35 mm) apart. Mounting of
bus bars in the horizontal plane will
necessitate additional drafting. Edgewise
orientation of the bus may change
the maximum ratings indicated. If
additional information is required
for other connections of cable or
bus, contact the Eaton Technical
Resource Center.
Interrupting Capacity
400415 Hz interrupting capacities of
the Eaton molded-case circuit breakers
are found in Table 27.2-14.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Application Recommendations
It is recommended that thermal
indicating devices such as tempi
plates be placed on the line and load
terminals or T-connectors of the center
pole. These are usually the hottest
terminals with a balanced load. A
maximum temperature of 90C (50C
over a maximum ambient of 40C)
would verify the maximum rating for
the particular application. Temperature
profiles taken on these breakers can be
correlated to ensure that the hottest
points within the breaker are within
the required temperature limits. A
thermal cutoff switch can also be
used to actuate a shunt trip to open
the breaker if the thermal limits are
exceeded. Consult the Eaton Technical
Resource Center for further information on special applications.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 030
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Table 27.2-14. Interrupting Capacities of 400 Hz Breakers

Breaker Frame
Series
Estimated 400415 Hz Interrupting Capacities (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

240V
480V
600V
EGB
EGC
EGE
5000
40,000
7000
3600
20,000
5000
7000
3600
EGH
EGS
EHD
20,000
17,000
3600
13,000
7000
2800
5000
4400
FDB
FD, HFD
JDB, JD
3600
13,000
8000
2800
5000
7000
2800
3600
7000
JGC
JGE
JGH
40,000
13,000
20,000
20,000
5000
13,000
7000
3600
5000
JGS
HJD
KDB, KD, HKD
17,000
14,000
21,000
7000
10,000
11,000
3600
7000
8000
LDB, LD
LGC
LGE
14,000
40,000
13,000
10,000
20,000
7000
7000
10,000
3600
LGH
LGS
HLD
MD
20,000
17,000
21,000
14,000
13,000
10,000
11,000
10,000
7000
5000
8000
7000
KD, LD, MDL, ND 14,000

HLD, HMDL
21,000
10,000
11,000
7000
8000
HND
RD
16,000
33,000
8000
33,000
Thermal-Magnetic
Electronic Trip Units
32
33

21,000
40,000
The above interrupting ratings are estimates based on the design parameters and operating
characteristics of each breaker as well as on the limited amount of test data thus far available
for circuit breakers applied to 400415 Hz systems.
Not UL listed.
Series G E-Frame is 600/347 Vac maximum.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.2-19
Sheet 27 031
Special Application Breakers
High-Intensity Discharge (HID)

Breakers
HID breakers are used to switch 120V
or 277V fluorescent lighting circuits
or high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits. Per UL 489 Section 7.14, they
must be listed and marked HID.
HID breakers are tested for endurance
at 75% power factor. The contacts
and the spring of an HID breaker are
heavier duty to dissipate the increased
heat from greater current flow during
the HID ignition period. For listing
of available HID rated breakers,
see Table 27.2-15.
Lighting Control Solenoid

Operated Breakers
Eaton manufactures a wide array
of solenoid operated breakers for
lighting control applications. These
are available in both 120 and 277V
single-pole and two-pole configurations. See individual circuit breaker
selection data, Table 27.4-12, for
more information.
For a full discussion of the use of these
breakers, see Tab 23 Lighting Control
SystemsPow-R-Command.
Switching Duty (SWD)

Rated Breakers
SWD breakers are rated 15 or 20A,
120 and 277V and intended to switch
fluorescent lighting loads on a regular
basis and are marked SWD, per
UL 489 Section 7.9. SWD breakers
are endurance-tested at 100 % power
factor. Eatons single-pole 120 Vac
QUICKLAG line, as well as the GB, GC
and single-pole 277 Vac GHB, GHBS,
GHC, EHD Series C and EG Series G
breakers are tested, rated and marked
SWD. In addition, there are other
SWD rated circuit breakers available
(see Table 27.2-16).
Heating, Air Conditioning

and Refrigeration Circuit
Breakers (HACR)
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Due to changes in the UL 489

standards, all circuit breakers meet
the requirements for HACR application.
NEMA AB-3 Standard, Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers and their Application
States, Section 430.53 of the NEC
permits the use of an inverse-time
circuit breaker as the branch circuit
protective device in multi-motor
and combination load installations,
commonly involved in heating, air
conditioning and refrigeration equipment. Circuit breakers do not need to
be marked HACR in order to be used
in these applications unless the end
use still requires that marking.
Engine generator circuit breakers are

designed specifically for application
on diesel engine powered standby
generator systems where high
interrupting circuit breakers are
not required. Generator breakers are
equipped with a special trip unit that
provides standard overload protection
with low magnetic short-circuit protection to suit generator applications that
call for close short-circuit protection at
low interrupting ratings.
Eaton offers a family of engine
generator circuit breakers from
15 to 1200A that conform to UL 489,
CSA and IEC 947-2 standards.
Frame
Poles
Ampere
Rating
BAB-D
1, 2
1560
CH-HID
1, 2
1530
1, 2
1530
GHBS
1, 2
1530
23
24
25
26
27
28
Table 27.2-15. HID Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
CHB-HID
22
120/240V
Maximum
29
277/480V
Maximum
30
31
HQP-D
1, 2
1560
QC
1, 2
1560
GHQRSP
1, 2
1530
BABRP
1, 2
1530
BABRSP
1, 2
1530
BRRP
1, 2
1530
CLRP
1, 2
1530
32
33
34
Table 27.2-16. SWD Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

SWD at
277 Vac
35
36
Breaker
Family
Frame
Mounting
Poles
Ampere
Rating
SWD at
120 Vac
QUICKLAG
Series C
Series G
GHB, GHBS, GHC and EHD

EG
All
All
All
1
1
1, 2
15 and 20
15 and 20
15 and 20
37
Table 27.2-17. HACR Rated Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Breaker
Family
Frame
Mounting
Poles
Ampere
Rating
Up to
240 Vac
Up to
480 Vac
QUICKLAG
Plug-on
Bolt-on
Cable-cable
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3, 4
15100
15100
10100
Series C
Series G
GD thru LD
EG thru LG
All
All
All
All
All
All
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 032
Special Application Breakers
22
23
24
25
26
Mining Circuit Breakers
Marine Circuit Breakers
Eaton mining circuit breakers have a

tradition of proven dependability and
reliability in harsh mine environments,
consistently combining strength and
reliability with safe, efficient operation.
The mining breaker is available from
152500A and is designed for trailing
cable applications per MSHA 30 CFR
75. With interrupting ratings up to
25 kA at 1000/577 Vac and rms sensing
electronic trip unit, the mining breaker
can be applied to all mining circuit
breaker applications.
Eaton circuit breakers can be

supplied to meet the following
marine specifications:
27
Mining breakers are available with a

full line of accessories.
28
NAVY MIL-SPEC Breakers
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
NAVY MIL-SPEC molded-case circuit

breakers provide both overload protection for conductors and short-circuit
protection for all circuit elements, such
as conductors, motors and starters.
They also serve as manual disconnecting means, as well as circuit protectors.
These breakers range from 5 to 1600A
with interrupting ratings to 100,000A
rms asymmetrical. These breakers
are rated 500 Vac class for use in
traditional 450 Vac three-phase open
delta ungrounded naval distribution
systems. Smaller distribution panel
breakers are rated 125 Vac. 60 Hz and
400 Hz versions are available as well
as 125/250 Vdc ratings.
All Eaton NAVY breakers meet
applicable MIL-SPECS including:
36
37
38
MIL-C-17588/QPL17588 ALB-1 Breakers

MIL-DTL-17361/QPL17361
AQB Breakers
MIL-S-901 Shock
MIL-STD-167-1 Vibration
MIL-STD-461 EMI
ASTM D5948 Special
Molding Compounds
U.S. Coast Guard CFR

ABSAmerican Bureau of Shipping
IEEE 45
DNV
Lloyds
ABS / NVR
These specifications generally

require molded-case circuit breakers
to be supplied with 50C ambient
ratings and plug-in adapter kits.
When plug-in adapter kits are used,
no terminals need to be supplied
(switchboard applications).
Duty Cycle is based on the one minute

averaging time of the breaker, and can
be determined as follows:
Weld Time 100
Duty Cycle = ---------------------------------------------------------Weld Time + Off Time
During-weld amperes can be
obtained from the welder manufacturer,
or as follows:
During-weld 1000
kVA
During-weld = --------------------------------------------------Amperes
Voltage
Interrupting capacity of the breaker
should be within the maximum available at the point of application. Refer to
Eaton for additional application details.
Circuit breakers can also be supplied

to meet UL 489 Supplement SA
(Marine usefor vessels over 65 feet
in length) and UL 489 Supplement
SB (Naval use).
Molded-Case Breakers for

Application on Resistance
Welding Circuits
Short-circuit protection for resistance
welding devices can be obtained by
properly applying instantaneous trip
molded-case circuit breakers.
Note: Instantaneous only breakers for welding application are intended for application
within the welding equipment not as feeder
breakers to welding machines.
These breakers permit normally high

welding currents, but trip instantaneously if a short-circuit develops.
These breakers include standard
molded-case circuit breaker features,
such as trip-free operation, deadfront
and single-phase protection. Because
the breakers are resettable after
tripping, replacement costs and
downtime are minimized.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

Application Data
27.3-1
Sheet 27 033
Application Information
Continuous Ampere Rating

Molded-case circuit breakers are rated
in rms amperes at a specific ambient.
This ampere rating is the continuous
current that they will carry in the
ambient temperature for which they
are calibrated. Eaton thermal-magnetic
breakers are calibrated for an ambient
temperature 40C (104F) that is
the average temperature within an
enclosure; thus, they minimize the
need for derating. If the enclosure
ambient is known to exceed 40C, the
breaker used should either be especially
calibrated for that ambient, or be
derated accordingly.
In accordance with the National
Electrical Code, all circuit breakers
are derated to 80% for continuous
loads except electronic trip unit circuit
breakers that have been tested and
marked for 100% application.
The selection of a specific ampere
rating for a given application is dependent upon the type of load and duty
cycle, and is governed by the National
Electrical Code. In general, the NEC
requires overcurrent protection at the
supply and at points where wire sizes
are reduced. It further states that the
conductors be protected in accordance
with their current carrying capacity,
but lists exceptions for applications
such as motor circuits where a larger
rating is often required to override
motor inrush currents.
Some test methods used in the field
are often poor indicators of the condition of a circuit breaker. These tests are
used to minimize test cycle and setup
times. Test types range from contact
resistance measurements to millivolt
drop checks.
Contact resistance should not be
considered a reliable measure of a
breakers ability to carry rated current.
Contact resistance is usually measured
with low currents from a low voltage
supply flowing through the contacts,
and the resistance value is heavily
dependent on transient contact
surface conditions. These transient
surface conditions can vary with
factors, such as the contact material,
the gaseous ambient and the current
level, and the resistance can markedly
decrease with the flow of rated
current. Observation of high contact
resistance should be considered only
as an indicator of the need for further
testing whenever circuit breakers are
being evaluated.
CA08104001E
The millivolt drop procedure outlined

in NEMA Standards Publication AB41996 Section 5.4 can be used to assess
the electrical integrity of connections
and contacts within a circuit breaker.
The IEEE paper by John Shea and
John Bindas, Measuring MoldedCase Circuit Breaker Resistance
Vol. CHMT-16, No. 2, March 1993,
is available as a guideline for more
reliable millivolt drop measurements.
Again, the millivolt drop can be
affected by contact surface conditions
that can change with breaker operation and arcing. Further, the millivolt
drop is only one factor in determining
the thermal loading of a breaker, and
the total system must be considered
prior to judging a breaker to be
unacceptable.
Proper thermal performance of a well
loaded circuit breaker is by far the best
indicator of a circuit breakers current
carrying capability, and a millivolt drop
test, performed at rated current, can
serve to indicate whether further
testing is required.
If the resistance and millivolt drop
test data raises concerns in regards to
breaker integrity, a proper thermal test
must be performed.
Circuit Voltage
Molded-case circuit breakers are rated
by voltage class and should be applied
only to system voltages within their
rating. The voltage rating is determined
by the maximum voltage that can be
applied across its terminals, the type
of distribution system and how the
breaker is applied in the system.
Circuit breakers listed for use at
120/240V may be applied on 120/240V
grounded systems. For applications on
240V ungrounded systems, apply only
circuit breakers rated 240V (with no
slash rating) or higher.
Circuit breakers rated 277/480V are
suitable for application on 277/480V
grounded wye systems and are not for
application on 480V ungrounded delta
systems. Apply circuit breakers rated
480V (with no slash rating) or higher
on 480V ungrounded delta systems.
UL 489 provides standards for testing

the individual poles of two- and threepole molded-case circuit breakers. The
test current is generally lower than the
interrupting rating of the molded-case
circuit breaker. This capability is
necessary for breakers applied on
corner-grounded delta systems where
single line-to-ground faults may be
interrupted by only a single pole of
a circuit breaker with full line-to-line
voltage across that single interrupting
pole. Molded-case circuit breakers
should not be used on circuits where
the available fault current exceeds
the level at which individual poles
were short-circuit tested at line-toline voltage.
23
24
25
26
27
Note: On all three-phase delta, grounded

B Phase applications, refer to Eaton.
28
Interrupting Ratings
29
Molded-case circuit breakers are available in various interrupting capacities.

Standard interrupting capacity breakers
are available in both industrial and
replacement circuit breaker lines.
These breakers have interrupting
capacities up to 35 kA at 480 Vac.
30
31
High interrupting capacity breakers are

similar to standard interrupting capacity
breakers, but the improved performance
makes these breakers suited for use in
todays network systems where higher
fault currents exist. These breakers have
interrupting capacities up to 65 kA at
480 Vac.
32
For applications that call for very high

interrupting ratings, current limiting
high interrupting capacity breakers
are available. These breakers offer true
current limiting characteristics in the
same physical frame size as the high
interrupting capacity version and have
interrupting capacities of 100, 150
and 200 kA at 480 Vac.
35
The maximum amount of fault current

supplied by a system can be calculated
at any point in that system. One rule
must be followed for applying the
correct circuit breaker.
38
The interrupting rating of the breaker

must be equal to or greater than the
amount of fault current that can be
delivered at that point in the system
where the breaker is applied.
40
The interrupting rating of the breaker

is the maximum amount of fault current
it can safely interrupt without damaging
itself. A breakers interrupting rating
always decreases as the voltage
increases. Interrupting rating is one of
the most critical factors in the breaker
selection process.
22
33
34
36
37
39
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 034
Application InformationCode Considerations
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Circuit Frequency
The tripping characteristics of most
molded-case circuit breakers remain
virtually constant when applied to
frequencies of 50 and 60 Hz. On higher
frequency applications, molded-case
circuit breakers must usually be specially
calibrated and/or derated. The amount
of derating depends upon the frame
size and ampere rating, as well as the
current frequency. In general, the higher
the ampere rating in a given frame
size, the greater the derating required.
Thermal-magnetic molded-case
circuit breakers applied at frequencies
above 60 Hz could require that individual consideration be given to thermal
performance, magnetic performance
and interrupting capabilities.
Electronic trip units are usually
calibrated for 50/60 Hz, although
operation at higher frequencies is
achievable with the use of special
derating factors and specially sized
cable or bus.
Avoid making circuit breaker
performance assumptions on
applications above 60 Hz. Consult
Eaton for molded-case circuit
breakers above 60 Hz.
Number of Poles
The number of poles in the breaker is
determined by the type of distribution
system. A pole is required for each
hot conductor, but usually not for the
neutral conductor, except in certain
special applications.
In general, a single-pole breaker may
be used on grounded neutral systems
for single-phase applications and a
three-pole breaker on three-phase
applications. There are instances,
however, where two-pole breakers are
necessary on single-phase systems and
four-pole breakers on three-phase
systems to interrupt the neutral. Certain
DC voltage applications also use
special multi-pole configurations.
Ground Fault Protection

Molded-case circuit breakers use
internal residual ground fault
protection schemes or separate
earth leakage modules using zero
sequence sensing when optional
ground fault protection is required. For
more information on how the scheme
operates, see Tab 1, Figure 1.4-7 and
the associated explanation.
Code Considerations
Circuit Breaker Sizing
The following paragraphs outline
pertinent information from the NEC
according to the type of load and
duty cycle.
Service
A service includes the conductors and
equipment for delivering electrical
energy from the supply system to the
wiring system of the premises served.
NEC Article 230 contains the many
requirements for services of 600V
or less including the sizing, location
and overcurrent protection of
conductors, disconnect means,
permissible number of disconnects,
grounding of conductors and ground
fault protection requirements of
service equipment.
Feeder Circuits
A feeder is composed of the
conductors of a wiring system
between the service equipment
or the generator switchboard of
an isolated plant and the branch
circuit overcurrent device.
NEC Article 220: Where a feeder
supplies continuous loads or any
combination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the
overcurrent device shall not be less
than the noncontinuous load plus
Exception: Where the assembly
including the overcurrent devices
protecting the feeder(s) are listed
for operation at 100% of their rating,
neither the ampere rating of the overcurrent device nor the ampacity of the
feeder conductors shall be less than
the sum of the continuous load plus
the noncontinuous load.
Only breakers listed for 100% application, and so labeled, can be applied
under the exception (for example,
type CKD). Breakers without 100%
application listing and label are applied
under (B) above, or at 80% of rating.
NEC Article 430: Breakers for feeders
having mixed loads; i.e., heating
(lighting and heat appliances) and
motors, should have ratings suitable
for carrying the heating loads plus the
capacity required by the motor loads.
Branch Circuits
A branch circuit is the portion of a wiring
system extending beyond the final
overcurrent device protecting the circuit.
(1) Lighting Circuits (NEC Article 310)
These are protected in accordance
with the conductor ratings as given.
High wattage incandescent lamp loads
may result in abnormally high inrush
currents that must be taken into
account to avoid nuisance tripping.
The lamp manufacturer should be
consulted for data relative to the
inrush currents.
(2) Motor Circuits (NEC Article 430)
Breakers are primarily intended for the
protection of conductors, motor control
apparatus and motors against short
circuits and ground fault conditions.
On motor overloads, the motor overcurrent device will open the circuit
before the correctly applied breaker.
Currents higher than the locked rotor
value will be interrupted by the breakers,
protecting the circuit from these heavy
fault currents. The breaker must not
trip on normal starting.
While breakers may be applied for motor

running overcurrent protection when
the requirements of Article 430 of the
NEC are met, these applications are
not recommended for Eatons breakers
and, therefore, this discussion is
confined to the use of a breaker
as a circuit protector.
For many applications, particularly
those where starting behavior of the
motor is unknown, the NEC maximum
rules are followed. Usually, lower
rated breakers can be used successfully. This is further discussed under
motor circuit application and motor
application tables.
Motor circuit application (NEC
Article 430): The breaker must have
a continuous rating of not less than
115% of the motor full load current.
Before applying a breaker, check to
determine the effect of any of the
following conditions: High ambient
temperature, heating within breaker
enclosure due to grouping of current
consuming devices, frequent
motor starting and lengthy motor
acceleration period.
NEC Article 430: Breakers for motor

feeders shall have a rating not greater
than the sum of the highest breaker
rating of any of its branches and the
full load currents of all other motors
served by the feeder.
CA08104001E
December 2013

Application Data
27.3-3
Sheet 27 035

Breaker rating or setting (NEC
Article 430): The motor branch circuit
overcurrent device must be capable
of capable of carrying the inrush current
of the motor. The required protection
should be considered as being
obtained when the overcurrent device
has a rating or setting not exceeding
the values given in Table 27.3-1,
reference NEC Article 430).
An instantaneous trip circuit breaker
(without time delay) should be used
only if adjustable and if part of a
combination controller having overcurrent protection in each conductor
and the combination is especially
approved for the purpose. In the event
a breaker chosen on this basis still
does not allow motor starting, a higher
rating is permitted by the code. See
Exceptions listed with Table 27.3-1.
Due to the infinite number of motorand-load combinations and because

comparable breakers of different
manufacture have different tripping
characteristics, NEC motor circuit
breaker rules are of a general nature
and are set up as maximum boundaries.
Protection is considered satisfactory if
the breaker rating does not exceed the
figure allowed by the NEC requirements.
Although Eaton breakers rated less than
the NEC maximum values may be
applied in most cases, many operating
engineers select breakers on the basis
of the NEC maximum rules simply
because consideration of other factors
is not usually necessary, or to ensure
motor starting when the starting
behavior of the motor is not known.
Tables 27.3-1 and 27.3-2 are adapted
from Article 430 of NEC.
When a certain motor is standard for
a given job, as on a volume-produced
machine tool, it is practical (and often
more economical) to select a breaker
for closer protection than one chosen
on the basis of NEC maximum rules.
Circuit Breaker Not Horsepower Rated

Unlike switches, circuit breakers are
not horsepower rated because they
are able to safely interrupt currents
far in excess of the locked rotor value
for any motor with which they may
be applied. This ability is recognized
in the NEC as stated in paragraph
430.109 and is proven by the
Underwriters Laboratories tests
described in UL bulletin number 489,
Standard for Branch Circuit and
Service Circuit Breakers.
For example, a breaker must pass
the UL overload test consisting of
breaking a current 600% of its ampere
ratings. As motor branch circuit
breaker ratings are usually 125 to
250% of motor full-load currents,
this test establishes the ability of the
breaker to more than interrupt locked
rotor currents. Following the overload
test and others, the breaker is called
upon to successfully clear its rated
short-circuit current that is a minimum
of 5000A. This also is many times
higher than motor locked rotor
current. Because by definition, a
circuit breaker is required to open
under abnormal conditions...without
injury to itself, the breaker must still
be in operating condition after the test.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 036
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Motor Branch Circuits

Table 27.3-1. Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground Fault Protective DevicesNEC Table 430.52
Percent of Full Load Current
Motor
Type
Instantaneous
Trip Breaker
Single-phase motors
AC polyphase motors other than wound rotor squirrel cage:
Other than Design B energy efficient
Design B energy efficient
Synchronous
Wound rotor
Direct-current (constant voltage)
Inverse Time
Breaker
800
250
800
1100
800
800
250
250
250
250
150
150
For certain exceptions to the values specified, see Sections 430.52 through 430.54. The values given in the last column also cover the ratings of
nonadjustable inverse time types of circuit breakers that may be modified as in Section 430.52, Exceptions No. 1 and No. 2. Synchronous motors of
the low-torque, low-speed type (usually 450 rpm or lower), such as are used to drive reciprocating compressors, pumps and so on, that start unloaded,
do not require a fuse rating or circuit breaker setting in excess of 200% of full load current.
Table 27.3-2. Full-Load Current Three-Phase Alternating-Current MotorsNEC Table 430.250

Hp
115V
29
Synchronous Type Unity Power Factor

Amperes
Induction Type Squirrel Cage and Wound-Rotor

Amperes
200V
208V
230V
460V
575V
2300V
230V
460V
575V
2300V
1/2
3/4
1
4.4
6.4
8.4
2.5
3.7
4.8
2.4
3.5
4.6
2.2
3.2
4.2
1.1
1.6
2.1
0.9
1.3
1.7
30
1-1/2
2
3
12.0
13.6
6.9
7.8
11.0
6.6
7.5
10.6
6.0
6.8
9.6
3.0
3.4
4.8
2.4
2.7
3.9
31
5
7-12
10
17.5
25.3
32.2
16.7
24.2
30.8
15.2
22
28
7.6
11
14
6.1
9
11
32
15
20
25
48.3
62.1
78.2
46.2
59.4
74.8
42
54
68
21
27
34
17
22
27
53
26
21
33
30
40
50
92
120
150
88
114
143
80
104
130
40
52
65
32
41
52
63
83
104
32
41
52
26
33
42
34
60
75
100
177
221
285
169
211
273
154
192
248
77
96
124
62
77
99
16
20
26
123
155
202
61
78
101
49
62
81
12
15
20
35
125
150
200
359
414
552
343
396
528
312
360
480
156
180
240
125
144
192
31
37
49
253
302
400
126
151
201
101
121
161
25
30
40
36
250
300
350
302
361
414
242
289
336
60
72
83
37
400
450
500
477
515
590
382
412
472
95
103
118
38
The following values of full load currents are typical for motors running at speeds usual for belted motors and motors with normal torque
characteristics. The voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed will be permitted for system voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220
to 240, 440 to 480, and 550 to 600V.
For 90% and 80% power factor, the above figures should be multiplied by 1.1 and 1.25 respectively.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-5
Sheet 27 037
Motor Protection
In line with 2008 NEC 430.6(A1)
circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating
selections are based on full load
currents for induction motors running
at speeds normal for belted motors
and motors with normal torque
characteristics using data taken
from NEC Table 430.250 (threephase). Actual motor nameplate
ratings should be used for selecting
motor running overload protection.
Motors built special for low speeds,
high torque characteristics, special
starting conditions and applications
will require other considerations as
defined in the application section
of the NEC.
These additional considerations may
require the use of a higher rated HMCP,
or at least one with higher magnetic
pickup settings.
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere
rating selections are in line with
maximum rules given in NEC 430.52
and Table 430.250. Based on known
characteristics of Eaton breakers,
specific units are recommended. The
current ratings are no more than the
maximum limits set by the NEC rules
for motors with code letters F to V or
without code letters. Motors with
lower code letters will require further
considerations.
In general, these selections were
based on:
1. Ambientoutside enclosure not
more than 40C (104F).
2. Motor startinginfrequent
starting, stopping or reversing.
3. Locked rotormaximum 6 times
motor FLA.
4. Locked rotormaximum 6 times
motor FLA.
Type HMCP motor circuit protector
may not be set more than 1300% of
the motor full-load current to comply
with NEC 430.52 (except for NEMA
Design B energy efficient motors
which can be set up to 1700%).
Circuit breaker selections are based
on types with standard interrupting
ratings. Higher interrupting rating types
may be required to satisfy specific
system application requirements.
Table 27.3-3. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide
Horsepower
Full Load
Amperes
(NEC) FLA
Fuse Size NEC 430.52

Maximum
Amperes
Recommended Eaton
Circuit
Breaker
Motor Circuit
Protector Type HMCP
Time Delay
Amperes
Amperes
Non-Time Delay
23
230V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
10
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
15
15
15
20
7
15
15
30
2170
45150
45150
90300
5
7-1/2
10
15
15.2
22
28
42
30
40
50
80
50
70
90
150
30
50
60
90
30
50
50
70
90300
150500
150500
210700
20
25
30
40
54
68
80
104
100
125
150
200
175
225
250
350
100
125
150
150
100
150
150
150
3001000
4501500
4501500
7502500
50
60
75
100
130
154
192
248
250
300
350
450
400
500
600
800
200
225
300
400
150
250
400
400
7502500
12502500
20004000
20004000
125
150
200
312
360
480
600
700
1000
1000
1200
1600
500
600
700
600
600
600
18006000
18006000
18006000
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
460V, Three-Phase
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
6
6
6
10
6
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
7
7
7
15
2170
2170
2170
45150
5
7-1/2
10
15
7.6
11
14
21
15
20
25
40
25
35
45
70
15
25
35
45
15
30
30
50
45150
90300
90300
150500
20
25
30
40
27
34
40
52
50
60
70
100
90
110
125
175
50
70
70
100
50
70
100
100
150500
210700
3001000
3001000
50
60
75
100
65
77
96
124
125
150
175
225
200
150
300
400
110
125
150
175
150
150
150
150
4501500
7502500
7502500
7502500
125
150
200
156
180
240
300
350
450
500
600
800
225
250
350
250
400
400
12502500
20004000
20004000
575V, Three-Phase
31
32
33
34
35
36
1
1-1/2
2
3
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.9
3
6
6
10
6
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
3
7
7
7
930
2170
2170
2170
5
7-1/2
10
15
6.1
9
11
17
15
20
20
30
20
30
35
60
15
20
25
40
15
15
30
30
45150
45150
90300
90300
20
25
30
40
22
27
32
41
40
50
60
80
70
90
100
125
50
60
60
80
50
50
50
100
150500
150500
150500
3001000
50
60
75
100
52
62
77
99
100
110
150
175
175
200
250
300
100
125
150
175
100
150
150
150
3001000
7502500
7502500
7502500
41
125
150
200
125
144
192
225
300
350
400
450
600
200
225
300
250
250
400
12502500
12502500
20004000
42
For motor full load currents of 208V

and 200V, increase the corresponding
230V motor values by 10% and
15% respectively.
CA08104001E
Adj. Range
22
37
38
39
40
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 038
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Capacitor Protection (NEC Article 460)

In normal applications, breakers rated
about 150% of capacitor rated currents
are recommended. This factor allows
for switching surges, and possible
overcurrent due to overvoltage and
harmonic currents. Such selection
fully meets the NEC requirements
in 460.8 for a conductor and disconnect to be rated not less than 135%
capacitor rating. Where the operating
currents exceed 135% of rated current
due to harmonic components, service
conditions may require the selection of
a breaker with a higher current rating.
For application in ambients higher
than the rated ambient of the breaker,
the breaker derating table should be
checked to determine the rating of the
breaker required to meet the minimum
of 135% capacitor rating.
Circuit breakers and switches for use with

capacitor must have a current rating in
excess of rated capacitor current to provide for overcurrent from overvoltages
at fundamental frequency and harmonic
currents. The following percent of the
capacitor-rated current should be used:
Fused and unfused switches . . . 165%
Enclosed molded-case circuit breaker
(includes additional de-rating for
enclosures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
Air circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
34
35
Contactors:
Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
Enclosed type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150%
Exception No. 2: An individual overcurrent device will not be required

where the primary circuit overcurrent
device provides the protection specified
in this Section.
overcurrent device is rated or set at a

current value not more than six times
the rated current of the transformer
for transformers having more than
6% impedance and not more than
four times the rated current of the
transformer for transformers having
more than six but not more than
10% impedance.
Exception No. 3: As provided in

(2) below.
(2) Primary and Secondary
Exception 4: Where the rated secondary

current of a transformer is 9A or more
and 125% of this current does not
correspond to a standard rating of a
fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, the
next higher standard rating described
in Section 240 will be permitted.
A transformer 600V or less having an

overcurrent device on the secondary
side rated or set at not more than 125%
of the rated secondary current on the
transformer shall not be required to have
an individual overcurrent device on the
primary side if the primary feeder overcurrent device is rated or set at a current
value not more than 250% of the rated
primary current of the transformer.
Where the rated secondary current is

less than 9A, an overcurrent device
rated or set at not more than 167%
of the rated secondary current shall
be permitted. Closer protection can
be provided by breakers having shunt
trips actuated by a temperature
sensing device imbedded in
transformer windings.
A transformer 600V or less, equipped

with coordinated thermal overload
protection by the manufacturer and
arranged to interrupt the primary
current, will not be required to have
an individual overcurrent device on
the primary side if the primary feeder
Table 27.3-4. Single-Phase Transformer Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided
kVA
208V
FLA
240V
277V
Breaker FLA
Trip
Breaker FLA
Trip
480V
Breaker FLA
Trip
600V
Breaker FLA
Trip
Breaker
Trip
2
3
5
10
14
24
20
30
50
8
13
21
20
30
50
7
11
18
15
20
40
5
6
10
10
15
20
4
5
8
7.5
10
15
36
48
72
70
100
150
31
42
63
60
80
125
27
36
54
50
70
100
16
21
31
30
40
60
13
17
25
30
40
50
25
37.5
50
120
180
240
225
350
450
104
156
208
200
300
400
90
135
181
175
250
350
52
78
104
100
150
200
42
63
83
100
150
150
10
20
36
Refer to Tab 35 for specific sizing of

protective devices by kVAR rating.
75
100
167
361
481
803
700
1000
1600
313
417
696
600
800
1200
271
361
603
500
700
1200
156
208
348
300
400
700
125
167
278
250
350
600
37
Transformer Protection
(NEC Article 450) Primary
250
333
500
1202
1601
2404
2000
3000
3200
1042
1388
2083
1600
2000
3000
903
1202
1805
1600
2000
2500
521
694
1042
800
1200
1600
417
555
833
800
800
1200
38
39
40
41
42
43
Each transformer 600V or less shall be

protected by an individual overcurrent
device on the primary side. Rated or
set at not more than 125% of the rated
primary current of the transformer.
Exception No. 1: Where the rated
primary currents of a transformer are
9A or more and 125% of this current
does not correspond to a standard
rating of a fuse or nonadjustable circuit
breaker, the next higher standard rating
described in Section 240 will be permitted. Where the rated primary current is
less than 9A, an overcurrent device
rated or set at not more than 167% of
the primary current shall be permitted.
Where the rated primary current is less
than 2A, an overcurrent device rated
or set at not more than 300% will
be permitted.
Table 27.3-5. Single-Phase Transformer Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided
kVA
208V
FLA
240V
Breaker
Trip
FLA
277V
Breaker
Trip
2
3
5
10
14
24
15
20
30
8
13
21
15
20
30
7.5
10
15
36
48
72
45
60
90
31
42
63
25
37.5
50
120
180
240
150
225
300
75
100
167
361
481
803
250
333
500
1202
1601
2404
480V
FLA
Breaker
Trip
FLA
Breaker
Trip
11
18
15
25
10
15
40
60
80
27
36
54
35
50
70
16
21
31
20
30
40
104
156
208
150
200
300
90
135
181
150
175
225
52
78
104
70
100
150
450
600
1000
313
417
696
400
600
900
271
361
603
350
450
800
156
208
348
200
300
450
1600
2000
3000
1042
1388
2083
1400
1800
3000
903
1202
1805
1200
1600
2500
521
694
1042
700
900
1400
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-7
Sheet 27 039

Table 27.3-6. Three-Phase Transformer Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided
kVA
240V
480V
FLA
Breaker
Trip
3
6
9
7
14
22
15
30
40
15
30
37.5
36
72
90
45
50
75
112.5
150
225
300
500
750
1000
600V
FLA
Breaker
Trip
FLA
Breaker
Trip
7
11
15
25
6
9
15
20
70
150
200
18
36
45
40
70
90
14
29
36
30
60
70
108
120
180
200
225
350
54
60
90
110
125
200
43
48
72
90
100
150
271
361
541
500
700
1000
135
180
271
250
350
500
108
144
217
200
300
400
722
1203
1804
2406
1000
2000
2500
4000
361
601
902
1203
600
800
1200
2000
289
481
722
962
500
700
1000
1600
Table 27.3-7. Three-Phase Transformer Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided
kVA
208V
FLA
240V
Breaker
Trip
FLA
480V
Breaker
Trip
3
6
9
8
17
25
10
20
35
7
14
22
10
20
30
15
30
37.5
42
83
104
60
110
150
36
72
90
45
50
75
125
139
208
175
175
300
112.5
150
225
312
416
652
833
1388
2082
2776
300
500
750
1000
600V
FLA
Breaker
Trip
FLA
Breaker
Trip
7
11
10
15
10
45
100
125
18
36
45
25
45
60
14
29
36
20
40
50
108
120
180
150
175
225
54
60
90
70
80
125
43
48
72
60
60
90
400
600
800
271
361
541
350
500
700
135
180
271
175
225
350
108
144
217
150
200
300
1200
1800
3000
3500
722
1203
1804
2406
900
1500
2500
3000
361
601
902
1203
500
800
1200
1600
289
481
722
962
400
600
900
1200
Slash Ratings from 2008 NEC Article

240.85 Applications
A circuit breaker with a straight
voltage rating, such as 240 or 480V,
shall be permitted to be applied in a
circuit in which the nominal voltage
between any two conductors does not
exceed the circuit breakers voltage
rating. A two-pole circuit breaker shall
not be used for protecting a threephase, corner-grounded delta circuit
unless the circuit breaker is marked
13 to indicate such suitability.
A circuit breaker with a slash rating,
such as 120/240V or 480Y/277V, shall
be permitted to be applied in a solidly
grounded circuit where the nominal
voltage of any conductor to ground
does not exceed the lower of the two
values of the circuit breakers voltage
rating and the nominal voltage
between any two conductors does
not exceed the higher value of the
circuit breakers voltage rating.
FPN: Proper application of moldedcase circuit breakers on three-phase
systems, other than solidly grounded
wye, particularly on corner-grounded
delta systems, considers the circuit
breakers individual pole-interrupting
capability.
For corner-grounded delta systems
refer to Eaton for reduced interrupting
ratings of selected type two- and
three-pole breakers.
For center tapped delta applications
where there is a tap between A
and C (high B being the leg),
the following applies:
1. The voltage from the tapped
winding center point that is
grounded is 0.867 x line to
line voltage.
2. Any single-pole breaker connected

to B phase must have a voltage
rating equal to 0.867 x line to
line voltage.
3. Any two-pole breaker should have
a full voltage rating equal to or
above line to line voltage (slash
rating is not acceptable).
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 040
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Cable Sizing/Selection
There is often much confusion about
the size and insulation ratings of cables
that are used with circuit breakers and
other types of electrical equipment
assemblies. Much of the confusion is
caused by not taking into consideration
the rating of the terminations of the
electrical equipment. When sizing and
selecting a cable, the designer must
consider the temperature rating of the
termination it will be landed on so that
the proper size and insulation rating
can be chosen.
Per UL 489, circuit breakers rated
125A or less shall be marked as
being suitable for 60C (140F)
only, 75C (167F) only or 60/75C
(140/167F) wire. All Eaton listed
breakers rated 125A and less are
marked 60/75C
Per UL 489, circuit breakers rated
over 125A shall be marked as being
suitable for 75C (167F). All Eaton
listed breakers rated over 125A are
marked 75C
31
32
33
It is important to note that the

termination rating of electrical
equipment is based on the entire
equipment assembly and not just the
rating of the lug termination itself.
Note: All listed electrical distribution

equipment rated 600 Vac and less has
a maximum cable termination rating
of 75C (167F).
There are many different types of
conductors and Table 310.13(A)
of NEC 2008 can help provide an
understanding of conductors to use
for various field-wired applications.
This table shows that insulation type
is a key aspect of a conductor that
impacts not only where it can be
installed but also the conductors rated
ampacity. Together with Tables 310.16
through 310.21, the cable ampacities
of various conductors with various
insulation types are presented to the
designer who must choose the appropriate conductor for the application.
When a designer is sizing cables for

termination on electrical distribution
equipment, they must ensure not
to exceed:
1. The temperature rating of the
equipment termination.
2. The insulation rating of the cable
at the full load ampacity of the
equipment.
The following are a couple simple
sizing examples to illustrate some of
the considerations for selecting and
sizing cables.
It should also be noted that many
terminals are suitable for use only
with copper wire. Where aluminum
or copper-clad aluminum wire is
used, the terminals must be marked
appropriately. The marking is usually
abbreviated as AL for aluminum,
CU for copper and AL-CU for a
terminal that can handle both.
Table 27.3-8. Sizing Example 1
34
Allowable
Ampacity
Properly
Sized
Explanation
#1/0 Cu Type TW (60C Insulation)
35
125A
Breaker Terminals
Rated 60/75C
36
37
38
The designer must review the equipment labeling or installation guidelines

to determine the proper cable size and
insulation required, regardless of the
markings on the actual lugs. For
example, panelboards, switchboards,
motor control centers and so on. often
contain lugs that are marked 90C on
the lug itself, however, the assembly is
only rated for a 75C cable termination.
Therefore, only cables with a minimum
of 75C insulation and rated/derated per
its 75C ampacity rating can be used.
60C 125A
Yes
Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment without exceeding the

equipment terminal ratings
#1 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)

60C 110A
75C 130A
No
Yes
90C 150A
No
The 60C rating of #1 Cu is not sufficient for the 125A equipment

Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment without exceeding the
equipment terminal ratings
Cannot use 90C ratingexceeds the equipment terminal ratings
Figure 27.3-1. Sizing Example 1

Table 27.3-9. Sizing Example 2
39
Allowable
Ampacity
Explanation
##3/0 Cu Type TW (60C Insulation)
40
41
Properly
Sized
60C 164A
150A
Breaker Terminals
Rated 75C
42
No
Meets the ampere requirement of the equipment, but equipment terminal

temperature rating exceeds cable insulation temperature rating
#1 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)

60C 110A
75C 130A
90C 150A
No
No
No

1/0 Cu Type THHN (90C Insulation)
43
60C 125A
75C 150A
No
Yes
90C 170A
No
The 60C rating of 1/0 Cu is not sufficient for the 150A equipment
The 75C rating of 1/0 Cu is sufficient for the 150A equipment and
does not exceed equipment terminal ratings
Figure 27.3-2. Sizing Example 2

CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-9
Sheet 27 041
Application InformationTrip Curves
Time-Current Trip Curve

Characteristics
Time-current trip curve characteristics
are available on the Eaton Web site.
The band curves shown for each
breaker type represent current tripping
limits for the breaker and are within
limits established by Underwriters
Laboratories. For a given current, at
rated ambient, a breaker will clear the
circuit automatically at some total time
within the two extreme values defined
by maximum and minimum curves.
For example, a single-pole, 15A
QUICKLAG would trip in no less than
10 seconds and in no more than
150 seconds on a 30A current.
Because of this allowed spread, users
should not specify exact tripping times.
The upper left portions of these curves

show the inverse time delay tripping
of the breakers due to thermal action.
The lower right segments for these
curves portray the magnetic tripping
action of the breakers. In the case of
the front-adjustable thermal-magnetic
breakers, the magnetic tripping
elements may be adjusted to trip at
values within a specific current range.
This adjustment is shown in the
respective characteristic tripping
curve. When these breakers leave the
factory, their magnetic trip elements
are set at the high side of their tripping
range. Adjustment downward may be
made to fit the requirements of the
installation. Currents equal to or
greater than these magnetic settings
will cause instant tripping.
10000
10000
5000
5000
1000
1000
500
500
Curves can be family curves and are

suitable for most applications; for more
accurate applications, a detailed curve of
the particular type and ampere rating of
the breaker should be requested.
The total time taken by a breaker to
clear a fault consists of the mechanical
operating time plus the time of actual
current interruption. Characteristic
time/current curves show total clearing
times. Magnetic only breakers have
no time delay in tripping. The tripping
characteristics of these breakers are
similar to the right-hand portion of
the standard breakers, except with
the vertical lines extended to the top
of the curve.
LONG TIME
PORTION
100
50
LONG TIME DELAY

A
50
T
I
M
E
I
N
10
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
5
SHORT TIME
PICK-UP
2
I t RAMP
.5
SHORT TIME
DELAY
A
.5
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
4
3
GROUND FAUL
F LT
PICK-UP
.01
34
I t RAMP
1
.8
.6
35
GROUND FAUL
F LT
TIME DELAY
A
.4
.3
36
.2
.1
.08
.06
37
.6 .8 1
3 4
6 8
INSTANT
T TANEOUS
PICK-UP
.05
INSTANTANEOUS
PORTION
32
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF
FRAME OR SENSOR RATING.
.1
.05
27
33
10
8
6
.04
.03
.2 .3 .4
.1
26
30
TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT CURVE

ADJUSTMENTS FOR SOLID-STATE TRIP
UNIT WITH ADJUSTABLE GROUND FAULT
PICK-UP AND DELAY SETTINGS.
I
N
10
S
E
C
O
N
D
S
25
31
MINIMUM
I
N
24
28
AMPERE RATING
A
OR
LONG TIME PICK-UP
100
T
I
M
E
23
29
MAXIMUM
T
I
M
E
22
38
39
40
.01
.5
1
5
10
50 100
500 1000
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING
Non-Adjustable Thermal-Magnetic
.5
10
100
5
50
500 1000
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES
L
OF RA
ATING PLUG OR CURRENT SENSOR
Electronic Trip Unit with Adjustable

Phase and Ground Current Settings
5000 10000
41
42
Figure 27.3-3. Typical Time-Current Curves
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 042
Application InformationSelective Coordination
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Design Issues
Design Considerations
In the design of Elevator feeders,

Emergency systems, Legally Required
Standby systems and new Critical
Operations Power Systems (COPS),
todays engineer faces greater
difficulty in meeting the NEC selective
coordination requirements. Whether
using breakers or fuses, the engineer
has to understand the nature of the
devices being selected, and properly
apply them, such that only the protective device nearest to the fault will open
to clear an overload/fault condition.
Overcurrent = Fault or Overload
29
4
30
31
32
D
D
Only This Overcurrent

Device 3 Opens for a
Fault or Overload at
C Locations
Only This Overcurrent

Device 4 Opens for a
Fault or Overload at
D Locations
3
C
33
34
For MCCBs and LVPCBs in the low

level overload or low level fault
current range (typically below 10 times
the device rating) it is only necessary
to ensure that the minimum time
band of the upstream device does
not overlap the maximum time
band of the downstream device.
This information can be typically
determined from the published
time-current curves of the devices.
In order to properly design a selectively

coordinated system, the design
professional engineer must recognize
how the various low voltage (600V and
below) overcurrent protective devices,
such as molded-case circuit breakers
(MCCBs) and low voltage power
circuit breakers (LVPCBs) operate.
Following is a brief discussion of these
devices in relationship to selective
coordination. Each MCCB and LVPCB
must have a voltage rating and
interrupting capacity equal to or greater
than the system voltage and available
fault current at its point of application
in the electrical distribution system.
Only This Overcurrent Device 2

Opens for a Fault or Overload
at B Locations
C
2
35
Only This Breaker 1
Opens for a Fault or
Overload at A Location
36
37
Branch
Circuit
38
A
Light Ballast
or Motor
39
40
Figure 27.3-4. Example of 100% Selective Coordination of Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
41
42
43
CA08104001E
December 2013

Application Data
27.3-11
Sheet 27 043

Low Voltage Circuit Breaker
Interrupting and Short-Time Rating
IEEE Standard 1015 defines the interrupting rating of the breaker as The
highest current at rated voltage that a
device is intended to interrupt under
standard test conditions. On the other
hand, IEEE Standard 1015 refers to the
short-time rating of the low voltage
circuit breaker as A rating applied to
a circuit breaker that, for reason of
system coordination, causes tripping
of the circuit breaker to be delayed
beyond the time when tripping would
be caused by an instantaneous
element. In other words, the devices
ability to stay closed and NOT open
the circuit immediately under fault
conditions. The short-time rating of
the breaker will be broken down into
two facets for ease of discussion:
1. Short-time current rating
The current carried by the circuit
breaker for a specified interval, or
the maximum current magnitude
under a fault condition for which
the circuit breaker can stay closed.
2. Short-time delay ratingAn
intentional time delay in the tripping of a circuit breaker between
the overload and the instantaneous pickup setting. The maximum short-time delay is the
maximum amount of time the
breaker can keep its contacts
closed under the fault condition.
If two breakers are in series, to
obtain selective coordination, the
upstream breaker must have a
short-time current rating above
the actual fault current on the load
side of any downstream breaker.
In addition, the upstream breaker
has to have short-time delay
capability long enough to allow
the downstream breaker to open
and clear the fault condition.
It should be recognized that as the
short-time current rating and/or shorttime delay rating of the upstream
devices is increased, should a fault
occur on the line side of downstream
circuit breaker 1 and the load side
of upstream circuit breaker 2 the
amount of the arc flash energy allowed
to the fault condition generally will be
increased significantly. This increased
arc flash energy reduces the safety
of operating and/or maintenance
personnel if they are present at the time
of the fault. The higher level of arc flash
energy also increases the potential for
major equipment damage, resulting in
fires and extended downtime.
CA08104001E
Current Limiting
Molded-case circuit breakers are

manufactured and tested to the UL 489
standard. Molded-case circuit breakers
have over-center toggle mechanisms
and either a thermal-magnetic or
electronic trip unit. The thermalmagnetic trip unit is such that the
magnetic pickup maximum setting is
approximately 10 times the trip rating.
The electronic trip unit is typically
furnished with a fixed instantaneous
override of approximately 10 to
15 times the breaker frame rating, or
trip unit rating. Thus, for molded-case
circuit breakers with electronic trip
units, for any load side fault above
these levels, the breaker will open. The
exact magnitude of current that will
cause the molded-case circuit breaker
to open instantaneously will vary
by 1) circuit breaker manufacturer,
2) circuit breaker frame rating, 3) type
of trip unit, 4) type/vintage of moldedcase circuit breaker, 5) manufacturers
curve tolerances. It will be assumed
that the current magnitude needed to
open molded-case circuit breakers
with electronic trips instantaneously
is 13 times the frame ratingits
maximum fixed instantaneous override. The manufacturers actual data
should be used to determine this
value. Typically for molded-case
circuit breakers, once the magnetic
pickup or fixed instantaneous override
is exceeded, the opening time is 1 cycle
or less.
Per UL 489-1991, current limiting

circuit breakers have characteristics
that, when operating within their
current-limiting range, limit the letthrough l2t to a value less than the l2t
of a 1/2-cycle wave of the symmetrical
prospective current. Current limiting
circuit breakers achieve this by
opening their contacts very rapidly,
such that their l peak let-through
current is reduced to a value much
lower than the l peak current available
from the system at the molded-case
circuit breakers point of application.
Although short-time ratings for

molded-case circuit breakers are not
covered in the IEEE Standard 1015 for
molded-case circuit breakers, some
molded-case circuit breakers are
equipped with electronic trip units
that have adjustable short delay
functions. However, they typically
also have either an adjustable
instantaneous trip (typically with
a maximum setting of 10 times trip
ampere) or a fixed instantaneous
override (of 13 times the frame
ampere rating). When the electronic
trip is in the short-time pickup range
(below 13 times frame size), they can
typically be adjusted up to a maximum
short-time delay setting of approximately 18 cycles (300 ms).
Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers

Insulated-case circuit breakers are also
manufactured and tested to the UL 489
standard, however, they usually have
a two-step stored energy mechanism
and increased short-time ratings.
These breakers are typically available
in 800, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000
and 5000A frame sizes. Although they
may have high interrupting ratings,
the typical instantaneous override
values for insulated-case circuit
breakers are 25 kA to 35 kA for the
smaller frames and up to 85 kA for the
larger frames. Maximum short-time
delay capability is generally up to
30 cycles (0.5s).
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Low voltage power circuit breakers
are manufactured and tested to the
UL 1066 Standard and ANSI C37
standards and have a two-step stored
energy mechanism. Low voltage
power circuit breakers are typically
available in 800, 1600, 2000, 2500,
3000, 4000 and 5000A frame sizes.
However, even the smaller 800A frame
size is available with very high shorttime current ratings of approximately
85 kA to 100 kA. Low voltage power
circuit breakers are capable of keeping
their contacts closed for up to 30
cycles of fault current, at levels up
to their maximum short-time current
rating. Thus, low voltage power
circuit breakers can normally provide
selective coordination with relative
ease when in series with each other, or
when supplying downstream moldedcase circuit breakers or low voltage
power circuit breakers.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 044
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Methods to Obtain 100%

There are various methods to obtain
selective coordination between overcurrent protective devices, but the
end goal is to have all the line side
overcurrent protective devices in
series to wait until the overcurrent
protective device directly protecting
the circuit having the overcurrent
opens. This means that typically as
the devices progress upstream toward
the source, each device on the line
side of a downstream series device
must have a longer waiting time. The
only two exceptions to this general
rule would be:
1. Two protective devices of the
same trip or fuse rating directly
in series.
2. A transformer primary feeder
breaker and transformer
secondary main breaker.
For both of these exceptions, it would
not matter which overcurrent device
would open or if they both opened,
because the protected circuit would
be disconnected in either case.
Circuit Breaker Selection

1. Select Specific Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers
Selective coordination between
upstream molded-case circuit breakers
and downstream molded-case circuit
breakers requires special consideration.
There are various ways to obtain
selective coordination, some applicable
basic methods are as follows:
For molded-case circuit breakers
with thermal-magnetic trip units,
select a line-side breaker with a
magnetic trip (instantaneous
element) setting above the calculated
available fault current level at the
load side downstream breaker
For molded-case circuit breakers
with electronic trip units, select
a line side breaker that has an
adjustable instantaneous element
or fixed instantaneous override
greater than the calculated available
fault current level at the load side
downstream breakers. In addition,
the line side breaker short-time
delay setting must be selected
to allow the load side breaker
adequate time to open and clear
the fault
2. Select Larger Line Side Molded-Case

Circuit Breaker
Select a line side breaker with a larger
frame size than would normally be
required when just considering the
load current requirements. Typically,
the larger the molded-case circuit
breaker frame size, the higher the
magnetic trip adjustment or fixed
instantaneous override value.
General rule: The magnetic trip setting
or fixed instantaneous override value
must be higher than the calculated
available fault current at load side
circuit breaker. However, the larger
the molded-case circuit breaker frame
size, typically the higher the associated
cost and arc flash energy on a fault
condition.
3. Select a Line Side Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breaker
Use the combination of upstream
low voltage power circuit breakers
and downstream molded-case circuit
breakers. The required combinations
will vary depending on the available
fault current. Most manufacturers
have low voltage power circuit
breakers available in two types.
Type 1: Low voltage power circuit
breakers with short-time current
ratings available up to 100 kA and
with interrupting ratings up to 100 kA.
Type 2: For fault currents above
100 kA, low voltage power circuit
breakers are available either as
combination low voltage power
circuit breakers with current limiters,
or as true current limiting versions
without current limiters. Both types
have interrupting ratings up to 200 kA,
but typically have reduced short-time
current ratings.
4. Select Both Line and Load Low Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers
When usinng low voltage power
circuit breakers, because of the high
short-time current ratings available in
all frame sizes, and their maximum
30-cycle short-time delay rating, there
is generally no problem obtaining
selective coordination between line
and load side low voltage power
circuit breakers. However, the higher
the short delay setting, the higher
the level of available arc flash energy
should a fault occur directly on the
load side of a given low voltage power
circuit breaker.
Use Manufacturers Test Information

Circuit breaker manufacturers, such as
Eaton Corporation, provide selective
coordination tables between specific
line side circuit breakers and load
side circuit breakers, for various
maximum values of fault current.
(See Table 27.3-10 for 100% Selective
Breaker Combinations.) These tables
are based on circuit breaker test data.
It should be noted that in many cases,
the allowable fault current levels to
achieve selective coordination is
significantly higher when using
the manufacturers specific test
information. This is attributed to the
high-speed performance of modern
molded-case circuit breakers that
in some cases are marked as being
current limiting: In addition, although
some molded-case circuit breakers
may not be formally marked as current
limiting, they still begin to open before
the first 1/2-cycle peak, inserting arc
impedance into the circuit, and thus
still reduce the peak let-through
current (lPI) with resulting lower l2t
values. This current reduction by
the downstream breaker reduces
the current to a level below the
instantaneous override of the
upstream breaker, thus providing
selective coordination for higher
fault current levels.
It should be noted that the test circuit
used by manufacturers to confirm
selective coordination must be known
and reasonable. Eatons test circuit
is similar to the test circuit used by
UL 489. This test circuit allows for
4 feet of wire for the combination
of wire from the load side of the
upstream breaker through the downstream breaker to the point of the fault.
0.1 Second Selective Coordination

Some applications and jurisdictions
only mandate breaker selectivity for
time periods longer than 0.1 seconds.
This allows the designer greater
flexibility to balance the affects of
arc flash risk, downtime risk, risk of
equipment damage and so on. with
selectivity. (See Table 27.3-11 for
0.1 Second Breaker Selectivity
Combinations.)
CA08104001E
December 2013

Application Data
27.3-13
Sheet 27 045
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker

Combinations
100% Selective Coordination
For 100% Selective Coordination
ApplicationsTable 27.3-10
The left side columns list the
amperages of the downstream
breaker grouped by the available
breaker frames. The next columns
on the right of the amperages indicate
the type of Pow-R-Line panelboards
and/or switchboard that the given
downstream breaker is available in
and whether the breaker may be used
in that assembly as a main, feeder or
sub-feed breaker.
The top rows of the table list the
amperages of the upstream breaker
grouped by the available breaker
frames. The next row below indicates
the type of trip unit needed:
T/M = Thermal-Magnetic
ETU = Electronic Trip Unit
For ETUs, the next rows indicate the
specific type of Digitrip RMS trip unit
and/or OPTIM trip unit available.
The minimum trip/maximum trip
rows indicate the amperage range for
which the indicated selectivity is valid.
The next rows below the minimum/
maximum trip indicate the type of
Pow-R-Line panelboards and/or
switchboard that the given upstream
breaker is available in and whether the
breaker may be used in that assembly
as a main, feeder or sub-feed breaker.
The values at the intersection of a row
and column represent the maximum
fault current at which selective
coordination can be achieved
between the chosen downstream
and upstream circuit breakers.
Steps in Determining Selective

Coordination Between Line and
Load Side Circuit Breakers
1. Determine the maximum available
fault current from all sources, at
both the upstream and downstream breakers, by means of a
short-circuit study, appropriate
charts and/or formulas. Where
both upstream and downstream
breakers are connected to the
same bus, this will be the
same value.
2. Starting on the left at the top
and moving downward, select
the downstream Eaton breaker
that has adequate Interrupting
Capacity (IC), voltage rating and
continuous amperage rating
for the downstream breaker
application. If the required
interrupting rating, voltage rating
or amperage rating is not shown
in the table, continue downward
to the row for the next larger
breaker frame.
5. Once an upstream family of

circuit breakers is determined that
selectively coordinates, you can
find the specific breaker within
that family that meets the required
interrupting capacity by checking
the breaker product overview
tables on Pages 27.4-4 through
27.4-6.
6. OptionalOnce the selective
combination of breakers is
determined, you can determine
the type of Pow-R-Line panelboard
or switchboard assembly that can
be used.
Note: If both the upstream and downstream
breakers are to be in the same assembly,
ensure that both devices are available in the
same type Pow-R-Line assembly.
Repeat the above steps for each pair of

breakers in the system to quickly and
easily select devices that will 100%
selectively coordinate.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
3. Move horizontally from the

selected downstream breaker
trip rating to the first value of
symmetrical rms fault current
that meets or exceeds the
value of rms fault current at the
upstream breaker as determined
from Step 1.
31
4. Proceed upward to read the

possible upstream breaker
frame. Check the minimum
and maximum trip range indicated
to ensure it meets the required
upstream breaker trip rating.
If the trip rating meets the
requirements, this will be one of
the possible upstream breakers
that will selectively coordinate
with the downstream breaker.
If the indicated trip rating or
trip range does not meet the
requirements for the line side
breaker, repeat Step 3 and Step 4.
34
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 046
Application Information100% Selective Coordination
22
Table 27.3-10. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 100% Selective Coordination Combinations
Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
Downstream Breaker
26
28
29
30
EG
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
J
T/M
Digitrip RMS Trip Unit
310+
310+
310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip)
125A
100A
150A
225A
15A
60A
100A
70A
150A
250A
Maximum Trip (Frame)
125A
100A
200A
225A
80A
160A
225A
125A
225A
250A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a
Pow-R-Line: Branch
3E
3a, 4, Swbd
4, Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Sub-Feed
1a, 2a, 3E
3a
Pow-R-Line Panelboard/Switchboard
Main
27
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
Branch
Sub-Feed
BR, BAB, HQP and QC (10 kA at 240 Vac) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.0
1.0
0.7
2.1
2.1
2.1
4.0
3.4
3.4
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
3.4
2.5
2.5
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.8
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
2.3
BRH, QPHW, QBHW and QCHW (22 kA at 240 Vac) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
31
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.0
1.0
0.7
2.1
2.1
2.1
4.0
3.4
3.4
32
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
3.4
2.5
2.5
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.8
1.2
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
2.3
33
34
35
GHB Family (65 kA at 240 Vac, 14 kA at 480Y/277 Vac)

20
30
50
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
2.2
0.8
0.8
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.8
2.8
2.3
0.7
0.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.2
1.8
2.3
1.8
2.3
2.3
1.8
1.6
1.8
2.3
36
FCL Family Current Limiting (200 kA at 240 Vac, 150 kA at 480 Vac)
37
EG Family (EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH)
100
38
39
40
Swbd
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
1.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.8
2.8
2.3
1.0
0.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
1.3
1.5
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.6
1.2
1.2
2.3
1.8
1.8
1.5
2.3
2.3
2.3
1.5
1.5
1.8
1.8
1.8
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
2.8
2.3
1.8
1.0
0.7
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.3
F Family (ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDB(150A), EHD(100A), FDE, HFDE, FDCE)
15
40
100
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1.0
1.0
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-15
Sheet 27 047

Table 27.3-10. MCCB 100% Selective Coordination Combinations (Continued)
22
Upstream Breaker
Downstream Breaker
Breaker Family
EG
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
J
T/M
310+
310+
310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
125A
100A
150A
225A
15A
60A
100A
70A
150A
250A
125A
100A
200A
225A
80A
160A
225A
125A
225A
250A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a
Pow-R-Line: Branch
3E
3a, 4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3E
3a
Branch
26
Sub-Feed
J Family (JDB, JD, HJD, JDC)

70
125
250
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, S
4, S
4, S
LCL 250 Family Current Limiting

125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
24
25
Main
23
27
28
29

200
300
400
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
K Family (KDB, KD, CKD, HKD, CHKD, KDC)

100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
L Family (LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC)

300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
30
31
32
33
LG Family (LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC)

250
400
600
35
LG Current Limiting Family

400
600
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
34
36
37
N Family (ND, CND, HND, CHND, NDC, CNDC, NGS, NGH, NGC)
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH Family
350
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 048
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
Breaker Family
LD
LD
LD
LD
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
Minimum Trip
(Plug/Trip)
100A
200A
400A
70A
125A
200A
300A
400A
600A
200A (OPTIM)
300A (Digi)
175A
350A
400A
125A
250A
400A
350A
500A
600A
600A
Pow-R-Line: Main
26
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
3a,4,Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
27
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
28
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.5
2.0
2.0
5.0
4.0
4.0
10
8.0
8.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
6.0
5.0
5.0
10
8.0
8.0
10
9.0
9.0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
29
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.2
1.2
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
30
31
32
33
34
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.5
2.0
2.0
5.0
4.0
4.0
10
8.0
8.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
6.0
5.0
5.0
10
8.0
8.0
10
9.0
9.0
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
22
22
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1.2
1.2
3.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
22
22
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
35
20
30
50
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.0
2.0
1.6
2.7
2.7
2.7
4.5
4.5
4.2
2.7
2.7
2.7
4.0
4.0
3.6
4.5
4.5
4.2
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
12
10
10
10
36
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2.5
2.5
4.2
4.2
3.6
3.6
4.2
4.2
7.4
10
7.4
7.4
12
12
7.4
7.4
2.8
5.0
6.0
6.5
10
10
10
10
37
100
Swbd
38
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
2.0
2.0
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
5.6
5.6
5.2
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.6
4.6
4.0
5.6
5.6
5.2
20
15
10
20
15
10
35
35
18
35
35
18
39
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
2.5
2.5
5.2
5.2
5.2
2.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.2
5.2
5.2
10
10
10
10
10
10
18
18
18
18
18
18
5.0
5.0
3.2
3.2
2.5
2.5
4.0
3.2
3.2
5.0
4.2
4.0
4.0
10
8.3
7.0
10
8.3
7.0
7.0
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
40
41
15
40
100
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
2.0
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.3
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-17
Sheet 27 049

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
LD
LD
LD
LD
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
Minimum Trip
(Plug/Trip)
100A
200A
400A
70A
125A
200A
300A
400A
600A
200A (OPTIM)
300A (Digi)
175A
350A
400A
125A
250A
400A
350A
500A
600A
600A
Pow-R-Line: Main
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
24
25
3a,4,Swbd
4, Swbd
23
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
26
Main
Branch
27
Sub-Feed

70
125
250
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a
2.0
3.2
3.2
3.2
2.5
2.5
4.0
3.7
3.5
6.0
6.0
8.0
7.0
7.0
12
12
10
12
12
10
3.7
3.2
2.5
4.2
3.7
4.2
4.2
3.2
17
17
17
17
17
17
3.2
3.2
3.2
17
17
17
17
17
17
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
2.0
3.5
3.2
2.5
4.2
3.7
4.2
4.2
3.7
10
10
10
10
10
10
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
35
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
36
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0

125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

200
300
400
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
28
29
30
31

100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

250
400
600
32
33
34

400
600
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
38
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH Family
350
37
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 050
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
Downstream Breaker
30
LHH
LG
LG
LG
LG
NHH
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
ETU
310+
310+
310+
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 125A
175A
225A
100A
160A
250A
600A
150A
200A
400A
250A
400A
600A
600A
350A
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
150A
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4
4, Swbd
Main
29
LHH
T/M
Pow-R-Line: Branch
26
28
LHH
Pow-R-Line: Main
25
27
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
10
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
9.0
9.0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
5.3
5.3
5.3
10
10
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
4.3
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
31
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
10
7.5
7.5
22
22
22
22
22
22
10
9.0
9.0
14.4
14.4
14.4
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
32
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
5.3
5.3
5.3
22
22
22
22
22
22
7.5
7.5
7.5
14.4
14.4
12
22
22
18
22
22
22
22
22
22
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
4.3
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
12
12
12
12
18
18
18
18
22
22
22
22
22
33
34
35

20
30
50
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
3.2
3.2
3.2
7.6
7.6
7.6
14
14
14
4.0
4.0
3.6
7.4
7.4
7.4
10
10
10
12.7
12.7
10
14
14
14
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
3.2
7.6
7.6
12.7
12.7
3.6
3.6
7.4
7.4
10
10
10
10
10
30
6.0
10
10
36
37
100
38
39
40
Swbd
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
10
7.5
3.2
27
14
10
65
35
18
4.6
4.6
4.0
20
15
10
35
35
18
65
65
65
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3.2
10
10
10
18
18
18
4.0
4.0
4.0
10
10
10
18
18
18
10
65
22
16
14
12
4.0
3.2
3.2
10
8.3
7.0
7.0
12
12
12
12
10
65
65
15
40
100
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
7.5
3.2
14
10
10
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-19
Sheet 27 051

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
LHH
LHH
LHH
LG
LG
LG
LG
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
ETU
310+
310+
310+
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
175A
225A
100A
160A
250A
600A
150A
200A
400A
250A
400A
600A
600A
350A
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
Minimum Trip (Plug/Trip) 125A

150A
Pow-R-Line: Main
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH
4
4, Swbd
Branch
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
26
1a, 2a, 3a
3.2
7.6
7.6
12.7
10
10
2.8
2.8
8.0
7.0
7.0
12
12
10
10
12.7
10
2.8
4.2
3.2
17
17
17
10
3.2
15
15
15
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
5.0
10
10
3.5
4.2
3.7
10
10
10
6.0
6.0
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
6.0
6.0

125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
25
Sub-Feed

70
125
250
24
Main
23
27
28
29

200
300
400
3q, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
30
31
32
33

250
400
600
35

400
600
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
34
36
37
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
NHH Family
350
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 052
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
26
27
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
400A
400A
400A
600A
800A
800A
800A
800A
1000A
1200A
400A
600A
800A
1200A
800A
1000A
1200A
1600A
2000A
2500A
Pow-R-Line: Main
4,
Swbd
4,
Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
28
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
29
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
30
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
31
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
32
33
34
35
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
36
37
20
30
50
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
70
100
2a
2a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
65/14
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
200/65
38
100
Swbd
39
15
30
50
3E
3E
3E
65
65
42
65
65
42
65
65
42
65
65
42
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
40
60
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
42
35
35
42
35
35
42
35
35
42
35
35
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
50
42
35
30
50
42
35
30
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
F Family (ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC, FD, HFD, FDC, FDB [150A], EHD [100A], FDE, HFDE, FDCE)
41
42
15
40
100
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a,4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
50
42
35
30
50
42
35
30
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-21
Sheet 27 053

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
510,
610,
810,
910,
1050
400A
400A
400A
600A
800A
800A
800A
800A
1000A
1200A
800A
1000A
1200A
1600A
2000A
2500A
400A
600A
800A
1200A
Pow-R-Line: Main
4,
Swbd
4,
Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
4, Swbd
23
24
25
26
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
27
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
28

70
125
250
2a, 3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
35
30
30
65
65
50
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
22
18
22
18
22
18
18
22
18
18
42
40
35
42
35
42
40
35
42
40
35
65
65
50
65
65
50
18
18
18
18
18
18
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
42
35
30
42
35
30
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
10
18
18
18
18
18
18
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
50
35
30
50
35
30
36
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
25
25
25
35
30
35
30
35
30
50
42
50
42
50
42
37
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
10
18
18
18
18
18
18
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
25
22
20
50
35
30
50
35
30
38
29

125
200
250
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
31

200
300
400
3q, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
30
32

100
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

300
400
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

250
400
600
33
34
35

400
600
LHH Family
150
200
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
400
600
800
1200
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
12
12
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
22
22
22
18
25
25
25
18
4, Swbd
12
16
16
16
16
22
25
39
40
NHH Family
350
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 054
Application Information0.1 Sec Selective Coordination
23
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker

Combinations0.1 Second
24
For 0.1 Second Selective Coordination

ApplicationsTable 27.3-11
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
The left side columns list the

amperages of the downstream
breaker grouped by the available
breaker frames. The next columns on
the right of the amperages indicate the
type of Pow-R-Line panelboards and/
or switchboard that the given downstream breaker is available in and
whether the breaker may be used in
that assembly as a main, feeder or
sub-feed breaker.
The top rows of the table list the
amperages of the upstream breaker
grouped by the available breaker
frames. The next row below indicates
the type of trip unit needed:
T/M = Thermal-Magnetic
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
ETU = Electronic Trip Unit

For ETUs, the next rows indicate the
specific type of Digitrip RMS trip unit
and/or OPTIM trip unit available.
The minimum trip/maximum trip
rows indicate the amperage range for
which the indicated selectivity is valid.
The next rows below the minimum/
maximum trip indicate the type of
Pow-R-Line panelboards and/or
switchboard that the given upstream
breaker is available in and whether the
breaker may be used in that assembly
as a main, feeder or sub-feed breaker.
The letter T at the intersection
of a row and column indicates that
0.1 second selective coordination
can be achieve between the chosen
downstream and upstream circuit
breakers up to the maximum
interrupting rating of the
downstream breaker.
Steps in Determining 0.1 Second Selective

Coordination Between Line and Load Side
Circuit Breakers
1. Determine the maximum available
fault current from all sources, at
both the upstream and downstream breakers, by means of a
short-circuit study, appropriate
charts and/or formulas. Where
both line and load breakers are
connected to the same bus, this
will be the same value.
2. Starting on the left at the top and
moving downward, select the
downstream Eaton breaker
that has adequate Interrupting
Capacity (IC), voltage rating and
continuous amperage rating for the
downstream breaker application.
If the required interrupting rating,
voltage rating, or amperage rating
is not shown in the table, continue
downward to the row for the next
larger breaker frame.
5. Once an upstream family of

circuit breakers is determined that
selectively coordinates, you can
find the specific breaker within
that family that meets the required
interrupting capacity by checking
the breaker product overview
tables on Pages 27.4-4 through
27.4-6.
6. OptionalOnce the selective
combination of breakers is
determined, you can determine
the type of Pow-R-Line panelboard
or switchboard assembly that can
be used.
Note: If both the upstream and downstream
breakers are to be in the same assembly,
ensure that both devices are available in the
same type Pow-R-Line assembly.
Repeat the above steps for each pair

of breakers in the system to quickly
and easily select devices that will
selectively coordinate to 0.1 seconds.
3. Move horizontally from the

selected downstream breaker
trip rating to the first column that
indicates T. (T indicates that
0.1 second selective coordination
can be achieved between the
chosen downstream and
upstream circuit breakers up to
the maximum interrupting rating
of the downstream breaker.)
4. Proceed upward to read the
possible upstream breaker
frame. Check the minimum
and maximum trip range indicated
to ensure it meets the required
upstream breaker trip rating.
If the trip rating meets the
requirements, this will be one of
the possible upstream breakers
that will selectively coordinate
with the downstream breaker. If
the indicated trip rating or trip
range does not meet the requirements for the line side breaker,
repeat Step 3 and Step 4.
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-23
Sheet 27 055

Table 27.3-11. MCCB 0.1 Second Selective Coordination Combinations
22
Upstream Breaker
Downstream Breaker
Breaker Family
EG
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
F
ETU
310+
310+
310+
310+
310+
310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
125A
100A
150A
175A
50A
80A
100A
150A
200A
225A
125A
100A
150A
225A
160A
225A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Pow-R-Line: Branch
3E
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Branch
24
25
26
Main
23
Sub-Feed
BR, BAB, HQP and QC (240 Vac, 10 kA) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27
28
29
30
BRH, QPHW, QBHW and QCHW (240 Vac, 22 kA) Single-, Two- and Three-Pole
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
34

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
35
36
15
40
50
100
33
37

15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
38
39
40
Note: T = Selectivity to 0.1 seconds is achieved with available fault current values up to the full AIC rating of the breaker.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 056
22
Table 27.3-11. MCCB 0.1 Second Selective Coordination Combinations (Continued)

Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
Downstream Breaker
26
28
29
EG
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310+
310+
310+
310+
310+
310+
OPTIM Trip Unit
125A
100A
150A
175A
50A
80A
100A
150A
200A
225A
125A
100A
150A
225A
160A
225A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3E
Pow-R-Line: Branch
3E
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Main
27
Breaker Family
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
30
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
31
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
32
33

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
34
35
36
37
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
38
39
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
40
300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
41
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
42
43
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-25
Sheet 27 057

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
70A
150A
250A
100A
200A
400A
70A
100A
125A
150A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3a
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
3a
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
23
24
25
26
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
27
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
28
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
29
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
GD Family (65 kA at 240 Vac, 22 kA at 80 Vac)
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
15
40
50
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
37
60
40
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
38
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
100
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
39
40
15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
41
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
42
CA08104001E
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 058
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
T/M
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
550,
1050
70A
150A
250A
100A
200A
400A
70A
100A
125A
150A
Pow-R-Line: Main
3a
Pow-R-Line: Branch
26
Downstream Breaker
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
3a
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
36
100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
37
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
38
39
40
41
42
43
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-27
Sheet 27 059

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
T/M
310
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
200A
225A
250A
300A
400A
300A
400A
600A
Pow-R-Line: Main
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
3a, 4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Branch
24
25
26
Main
23
Sub-Feed
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27
28
29
30
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
34

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
37
38
39
40

15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CA08104001E
35
36
15
40
50
100
33
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 060
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
26
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
T/M
T/M
T/M
310
310
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
550, 1050
200A
225A
250A
300A
400A
300A
400A
600A
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
3a, 4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
Main
29
ETU
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
28
Type Trip Unit
Pow-R-Line: Main
25
27
Breaker Family
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
30
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
33

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
34
35
36
37
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
38
39
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
40
300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
41
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
42
43
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-29
Sheet 27 061

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
LG
LG
LG
LG
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310(+)
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050
300A
Pow-R-Line: Main
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
N
ETU
310(+)
550, 1050 550, 1050
400A
600A
250A 300A 400A 500A 400A
600A
600A
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4, Swbd
PRL4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
PRL4, Swbd
Branch
24
25
26
Main
23
Sub-Feed
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27
28
29
30
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
34

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
37
38
39
40

15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CA08104001E
35
36
15
40
50
100
33
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 062
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
Downstream Breaker
LG
LG
LG
LG
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
310+ 310+ 310+ 310+ 310(+)
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050 550, 1050 550, 1050
300A
400A
600A
250A 300A 400A 500A 400A
600A
N
ETU
310(+)
550, 1050 550, 1050
600A
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4, Swbd
PRL4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
PRL4, Swbd
Main
29
ETU
Pow-R-Line: Branch
26
28
Type Trip Unit
Pow-R-Line: Main
25
27
Breaker Family
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
30
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
33

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
34
35
36
37
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
38
39
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
40
300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
41
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
42
43
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-31
Sheet 27 063

22
Upstream Breaker
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310(+)
310(+)
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050 550, 1050 510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
800A
1000A
800A
1000A
1200A
1200A
Pow-R-Line: Main
PRL4, Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
24
25
26
Swbd
PRL4, Swbd
23
Swbd
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
27
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
28
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
29
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
15
40
50
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
37
60
40
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
38
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
100
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
39
40
15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
41
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
42
CA08104001E
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 064
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
25
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
ETU
310(+)
310(+)
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
550, 1050 550, 1050 510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
510, 610, 810,

910, 1050
800A
1000A
800A
1000A
1200A
1200A
Pow-R-Line: Main
PRL4, Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch
26
Downstream Breaker
PRL4, Swbd
Swbd
Swbd
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Main
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
36
100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
37
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
38
39
40
41
42
43
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-33
Sheet 27 065

22
Upstream Breaker
Downstream Breaker
Breaker Family
Type Trip Unit
ETU
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
1600A
2000A
2500A
Swbd
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Swbd
25
26
Main
Branch
24
Pow-R-Line: Main
23
Sub-Feed
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
27
28
29
30
15
20
30
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
40
50
60
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
70
80
90
100
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd

1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
34

20
30
60
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
70
100
2a
2a
2a, 3a, 4, Swbd

2a, 3a, 4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
15
40
50
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
40
100
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
1a, 2a, 3a
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
37
38
39
40

15
20
50
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
60
90
100
125
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CA08104001E
35
36
15
40
50
100
33
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 066
22

Upstream Breaker
23
24
26
ETU
ETU
310
310
310
OPTIM Trip Unit
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
510, 610, 810, 910, 1050
1600A
2000A
2500A
Swbd
Swbd
Main
29
ETU
Pow-R-Line: Branch
Downstream Breaker
28
Type Trip Unit
Pow-R-Line: Main
25
27
Breaker Family
Branch
Sub-Feed
15
40
70
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
100
125
150
225
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
3a, 4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
J Family
30
70
100
125
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
31
175
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
32
33

150
200
225
250
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
34
35
36
37
225
275
300
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd

100
150
200
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
250
300
400
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E

1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
1a, 2a, 3a, 3E
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
38
39
300
350
400
3a, 4
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
500
600
3a, 4
3a, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
40
300
350
400
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
41
500
600
3a, 3E, 4
3a, 3E, 4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
42
43
400
600
800
1200
4
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
4, Swbd
CA08104001E
December 2013

Application Data
27.3-35
Sheet 27 067
Application InformationArc Flash
Electric Arc Flash Hazards

There have been several recent codes
and standards regulations that relate
to the fundamental dangers of arc
flash energy. The following provides
a brief overview.
The NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical
Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces presents numerous
requirements for a wide range of
topics such as electrical equipment,
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE),
lockout/tagout practices and safety
training. Where it has been determined that work will be performed
within the flash protection boundary,
NFPA 70E requires an analysis to
determine and document the flash
hazard incident energy exposure
of a worker. This document also
contains some of the initial methods
developed in order to quantify the
incident energy.
The Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) is the governmental enforcement agency whose
mission is to save lives, prevent
injuries and protect the health of
Americas workers. They refer to their
standard Code of Federal Regulations,
CFR 1910.333, Selection and Use
of Work Practices, which states
Safety-related work practices shall
be employed to prevent electric shock
or other injuries resulting from either
direct or indirect electrical contacts,
when work is performed near or on
equipment or circuits which are or
may be energized. This general
statement provides the basis for
OSHAs citing and insisting upon
compliance with the arc flash requirements contained in NFPA 70E.
The 2002 edition of the National
Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70,
contained the first arc flash hazard
references by adding the following
new requirement as Article 110.16.
Flash Protection. Switchboards,
panelboards, industrial control
panels, and motor control centers that
are in other than dwelling occupancies
and are likely to require examination,
adjustment, servicing or maintenance
while energized, shall be field marked
to warn qualified persons of potential
electric arc flash hazards. The marking
shall be located so as to be clearly
visible to qualified persons before
examination adjustment, servicing,
or maintenance of the equipment.
CA08104001E
22
3.50
(88.9)
23
DANGER
24
ELECTRIC ARC FLASH HAZARD

Will cause severe
injury or death.
2.75
(69.8)
Turn OFF ALL power

before opening. Follow
ALL requirements in
NFPA 70E for safe
work practices and for
Personal Protective
Equipment.
Note to installer: Apply label as required by 2002 NEC Art. 110.16.
If desired, additional labels may be purchased through your local
EATON representative.
25
3.25
(82.5)
26
27
0.50
(12.7)
28
29
30
Figure 27.3-5. Electric Arc Flash Hazard

FPN No. 1: NFPA 70E-2000, Electrical
Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces, provides assistance in
determining severity of potential
exposure, planing safe work
practices, and selecting personal
protective equipment.
FPN No. 2: ANSI Z535.4-1998,
Product Safety Signs and Labels,
provides guidelines for the design of
safety signs and labels for application
to products.
There were numerous proposals
for the 2005 NEC that would expand
this requirement to indicate the
incident energy in calories per
square centimeter for a worker at a
distance of 18 in. Adoption of this
requirement would indicate the
need for a standardized method for
determining incident energy.
The IEEE 1584-2002, Guide for
Performing Arc Flash Calculations,
provides a method for the calculation
of incident energy and arc flash
protection boundaries. It presents
formulas for numerically quantifying
these values. The IEEE 1584 Guide
also includes an Excel spreadsheet
Arc Flash Hazard Calculator that
performs the actual calculations using
the formulas stated in the Guide.
The hazard analysis cited in NFPA 70E

requires calculations of the incident
energy available at a given location.
This energy is calculated in cal/cm 2
and, based on amount of energy available, a risk category is assigned, and
based on that risk category, certain
levels of PPE are required. These risk
categories are designed to limit worker
injuries to second degree burns that
occur at energy levels of 1.2 cal/cm 2.
The calculations have two components:
1) magnitude fault current and
2) duration of the fault. The specifics
of the formulas are beyond the scope
of this discussion, but several factors
included in the calculations need
understanding. Faster clearing times
significantly reduce the incident
arc flash energy.
The third factor affecting arc flash
incident energy exposure to personnel
is the distance the person is from the
arc flash location.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 068
Application InformationArc Flash
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Selected models of Eatons moldedcase circuit breakers are available with

an Arcflash Reduction Maintenance
System to provide reduced levels of
incident arc flash energy when put in
the Maintenance Mode.
The Arcflash Reduction Maintenance
System is available on Magnum power
circuit breakers, NRX power circuit
breakers and select Series G moldedcase circuit breakers. In Series G
molded-case breakers, the trip unit
combines Eatons Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System with the Digitrip
310+ electronic trip unit, allowing for
the ability to place the trip unit in
Maintenance Mode to reduce potential
arc flash energy. This is done by a
dedicated instantaneous sensing circuit
with settings of 2.5 and 4.0 times the
current rating of the trip unit. This
dedicated analog sensing circuit
delivers breaker clearing times that
are faster than instantaneous by
eliminating microprocessor processing
latencies. This provides superior
arc flash reduction to competitors
systems that simply lower the standard
instantaneous pickup set point.
When the Eaton Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System is enabled, the
resulting reduced arc flash energy
allows for reduced PPE, which
improves worker comfort and
mobility. With the Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System set at 2.5X or
4.0X, it reduces incident energy levels
to allow PPE Category 0 for currents of
2.5X or 4.0X the breaker ampere rating
or greater. The initial setting of each
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance
System trip unit is determined by
completing a power system analysis,
to assess available fault current at the
circuit breaker. Based on that analysis,
the Maintenance Mode protection
settings are defined, achieving a
reduced level of arc flash energy.
The Maintenance Mode is then
activated by adjusting the trip units
instantaneous setting to desired
Maintenance Mode levels determined
by the power analysis.
Current in Amperes
1
10
100
1K
1000
100
10
480V Feeder
Magnum DS, RMS 520M
Trip 1600.0A
Plug 1600.0A
Setting Phase
LTPU (0.4-1.0 x P) 1 (1600A)
LTD (2-24 Sec.) 12
STPU (2-12 x LTPU) 6 (9600A)
STD (0.1-0.5 Sec.) 0.2 (l 2t In)
INST (2-12 x P) M1 (12) (19,200A)
10K
1000
100
480V Feeder
ARMS
Trip 1600.0A
Plug 1600.0A
Settings ARMS
ARMS 2.5 (4000A)
10
Time in Seconds
28
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
1
Motor
700.0 hp
0.10 Eatons Arcflash Reduction

Maintenance System Gives
Clearing Times That Are
Faster Than Instantaneous
0.10
0.01
0.5
10
100
1K
0.01
10K
Figure 27.3-6. Time Current Curve
Series G MCCB Features
Close-Up of LG Trip Unit
Available with ALSI and ALSIG

electronic trip unit
Dedicated analog trip circuit for
faster than instantaneous tripping
Superior arc flash reduction
over systems that simply lower
the standard instantaneous
pickup set point
Adjustable pickup settings
(2.5x, 4.0x)
Local or remote initiation
Maintenance Mode LED
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-37
Sheet 27 069
Application InformationUnusual Environmental Conditions
Unusual Environmental Conditions

Trip Unit Temperatures
Eatons thermal-magnetic circuit
breakers are temperature sensitive.
At ambient temperatures below 40C
(104F), circuit breakers carry more
current than their continuous current
rating. Nuisance tripping is not a problem under these lower temperature
conditions, although consideration
should be given to closer protection
coordination to compensate for the
additional current carrying capability.
In addition, the actual mechanical
operation of the breaker could be
affected if the ambient temperature is
significantly below the 40C standard.
For ambient temperatures above
40C, breakers will carry less current
than their continuous current rating.
This condition promotes nuisance
tripping and can create unacceptable
temperature conditions at the terminals.
Under this condition, the circuit breaker
should be recalibrated for the higher
ambient temperature.
Electronic trip units are insensitive to
ambient temperatures within a certain
temperature range. The temperature
range for most Eaton electronic trip
units is 20 to 55C (4 to 131F).
However, at very low ambient
temperatures, the mechanical parts
of the breaker could require special
treatment, such as the use of special
lubricants. If the ambient temperature
exceeds 40C significantly, damage
to the electronic circuitry and other
components could result. Eaton
includes temperature protective
circuits in its designs to initiate a
tripping operation and provide
self-protection, should the internal
temperature rise to an unsafe level.
Circuit Breaker Temperatures

The temperature of the air surrounding a circuit breaker is the ambient
temperature. In the mid-1960s, industry
standards were changed to make all
standard breakers calibrated to a 40C
ambient temperature. For any ambient
temperature application above or below
40C, it is recommended that the
breaker manufacturer be consulted as
to any possible re-rating, recalibration
or special procedures, before the
circuit breaker is selected and applied.
CA08104001E
Table 27.3-12. Derating for Non-Compensated

Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Calibrated for 40C
Breaker Ampere
Rating at 40C
Ampere Rating
25C
(77F)
50C
(122F)
60C
(140F)
F-Frame/EG-Frame
15
20
25
17
22
32
13
18
21
11
16
18
30
35
40
33
41
45
27
32
34
24
27
29
50
60
70
55
66
77
46
56
65
42
52
60
90
100
125
150
99
110
137
165
84
94
116
138
78
87
105
125
GD-Frame
15
20
25
14
19
24
13
18
22
30
35
40
28
33
38
27
31
36
45
50
60
43
48
57
40
45
54
70
80
90
100
67
76
86
96
63
72
81
91
70
90
100
79
102
115
63
81
89
55
71
76
125
150
175
140
171
200
114
134
156
102
116
134
200
225
250
230
252
281
178
205
227
153
183
201
100
125
150
121
145
188
90
116
132
79
106
111
175
200
225
210
243
255
159
180
212
141
157
198
250
300
350
400
294
364
412
471
230
270
322
368
208
236
291
333
J-Frame/JG-Frame
K-Frame
Humidity/MoistureCorrosion
Molded-case circuit breakers are
suited for operation in 0 to 95% noncondensing humidity environments. As
is the case with all electrical equipment,
application in a condition or environment above this humidity level should
be avoided. The ability of molded-case
circuit breakers to perform their protective function is negatively affected by
exposure to condensation or water,
as well as the minerals, particles and
contaminants that may be present in
them. Prolonged humidity exposure
and/or the presence of corrosive
elements can result in damage to key
operating components and/or severely
compromise the breakers operational
integrity. It may adversely impact
breaker contact condition and reduce the
insulation and dielectric properties of the
circuit breaker. In electronic trip circuit
breakers, functionality may be similarly
compromised by these conditions. To
prevent these effects, the breaker should
be protected by the proper NEMA rated
enclosure for its installation environment, and kept dry through the use of
space heaters in the enclosure. If such
operating conditions cannot be met,
special treatment of the circuit breaker
should be considered to minimize the
possibility of operational problems.
Most Eaton molded-case circuit breaker
cases are molded from glass polyester
that does not support the growth of
fungus. In addition, a special moistureand fungus-resisting treatment is
recommended for any parts that are
susceptible to the growth of fungus.
Altitude
Low voltage circuit breakers must be
progressively derated for voltage,
current carrying and interrupting rating
at altitudes above 6000 ft (1829m). The
thinner air at higher altitudes reduces
cooling and dielectric characteristics
compared to the denser air found at
lower altitudes. Refer to Eaton for
additional application details.
Shock/Vibration
L-Frame/LG-Frame
300
350
400
330
385
440
276
325
372
252
301
340
500
600
550
660
468
564
435
525
300
350
400
332
388
444
277
322
368
252
292
334
450
500
600
495
550
660
418
468
564
383
435
525
700
800
770
880
658
754
613
704
M-Frame
Where high shock is an anticipated

condition, hi-shock Navy MIL-SPEC
type breakers are recommended.
Molded-case circuit breakers can be
supplied to meet the following marine
specifications, several of which require
vibration testing: U.S. Coast Guard
CFR 46, ABSAmerican Bureau of
Shipping, IEEE 45, UL 489 Supplement
SA Marine, UL 489 Supplemental SB
Naval, ABS/NVR, Lloyds of London
and DNV. See Page 27.2-20 for
additional information on Navy
MIL-SPEC and marine circuit breakers.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 070
Application InformationReverse-Feed Applications
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Reverse-Feed Application
of Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers may be applied in
panelboard, switchboard or motor
control center installations where
there may occasionally be multiple
sources of power, as shown in
Figure 27.3-7. For example, these
may be applications that require
high uptime and high reliability
requirements. For these requirements, permanent, fixed mount or
portable electrical generator systems,
with an appropriate automatic transfer
switching system, are made available
to supplement the normal utility
power supply source. In other
instances, the second power source
may be from a so-called alternate
energy source, such as that derived
from solar photovoltaic or from wind
power electric systems. Similarly,
these alternate energy sources are
also typically connected as a supplement to the normal utility power
sources. As electrical load demand
conditions change, the user may
switch between using power from the
normal utility source to the alternate
power source, and vice versa. Whenever this switch in power source
occurs, the terminals of the circuit
breaker that the power is connected to
will have been reversed. This reversal
in the way that power is connected to
a circuit breaker is called reversefeed. Reverse-feed (or back feed)
refers to a way that the conductors
supplying current are connected to a
circuit breaker.
This Circuit Breaker May Be
Reverse-Fed Depending on
Its Connection to Either of the
Utility Power Sources
Utility #1
52 NC
NO
Bus #1
52
Utility #2
52 NC
Bus #2
52
52
Load
Load
In other applications where there is a

single power source, circuit breakers
may be mounted in an electrical
enclosure where the cables from the
power source are fed to the bottom
of the enclosure. In this case, it may
be a matter of convenience for the
installation to simply connect the
power source conductors to the
terminals at the bottom of the
circuit breaker that are closest to the
incoming power supply conductors.
This connection of the power supply
source to the circuit breakers
bottom terminals will also result
in power being applied in a reversefeed manner.
There are different classifications
and types of circuit breakers that
exist, and they should be carefully
considered when used in reversefeed applications described above.
Depending on the type of circuit
breaker, as listed below, reversefeeding of that circuit breaker
may or may not be suitable for
that application.
Circuit Breaker Classifications

Low voltage circuit breakers fall into
two basic classifications of design.
Testing Requirements
Per UL 489, Paragraph 7.1.1.18: Except
for single-pole circuit breakers tested
singly, if a circuit breaker is not marked
Line and Load, one sample of
each set tested, or one additional
sample, shall be connected with the
line and load connections reversed
during the overload, endurance and
interrupting tests.
This UL test requirement specifies that
for circuit breakers and molded-case
switches to be UL Listed for reversefeed applications, samples shall be
tested with the line and load terminals
reverse-fed, as shown in Figure 27.3-8,
and that the test results shall be the
same as those of normally fed
circuit breakers.
Depending on the design configuration and construction, the circuit
breaker may or may not be affected by
the application of power in a reversefeed connection during these tests.
Top Side
of Circuit
Breaker
Power
Source
Load
Connected to
Top Side of
Circuit Breaker
1. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

(MCCBs) per UL 489 Standard
2. Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
(LVPCBs) per UL 1066 Standard
Circuit
Breaker
Standards Requirements
UL 489Molded-Case Circuit Breakers,
Molded-Case Switches and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures
Per UL 489, there are clear test
performance and marking requirements for circuit breakers and
molded-case switches that are
UL listed as being suitable for
reverse-feed applications. UL 489
requires reverse-feed circuit breakers
to meet certain construction requirements, and to be tested and marked
accordingly, as follows:
Power
Source
Connected
to Bottom
Side of
Circuit Breaker
Load
Bottom Side
of Circuit
Breaker
Figure 27.3-8. Circuit Breaker Connections

for Reverse-Feed Testing per UL 489
1. Tested per UL 489,

Paragraph 7.1.1.18
2. Markings per UL 489,
Paragraph 9.1.1.13
42
43
Figure 27.3-7. Circuit Breaker Fed from

Multiple Power Supply Sources
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-39
Sheet 27 071

Marking Requirements
MCCB General Rule
PCB General Rule
Per UL 489 Paragraph 9.1.1.13: Circuit

breakers shall be marked Line and
Load unless the construction and
test results are acceptable with the line
and load connections reversed.
This marking requirement specifies
that UL listed circuit breakers and
molded-case switches shall be marked
with the word Line on one end of
the circuit breaker and the word
Load on the other end, as shown
in Figure 27.3-9, if they are unable to
successfully meet the reverse-feed test
requirements per Paragraph 7.1.1.18
of UL 489. Conversely, a UL listed
circuit breaker does not have to be
marked with Line and Load if it
successfully meets the reverified test
requirements.
Cannot be reverse-fed:
When a UL listed molded-case
circuit breaker and a molded-case
switch (not shown) are marked
showing Line and Load, the
power supply conductors must be
connected to the end marked
Line. These devices cannot be
reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
If Line and Load are not
marked on the UL listed moldedcase circuit breaker, the power
supply conductors may be
connected to either end. These
devices are suitable for reversefeed applications
UL 1066Low Voltage AC and DC Power

Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures
As part of the standard test programs
required by UL 1066 (referenced to
ANSI/IEEE C37.50-1989) for low
voltage power circuit breakers, tests
are conducted that, when successfully
completed, demonstrate that the
circuit breaker may be applied in a
reverse-feed configuration.
These are mandatory tests that
are done as part of the short-circuit
current tests per Table 3 in Sequence II
(Power-Operated Circuit Breaker
with Dual Trip Device) of ANSI/IEEE
C37.50-1989. As part of this sequence,
tests are to be performed with
opposite terminals energized.
Figure 27.3-9. Circuit Breakers Showing

Line and Load Markings, per UL 489
During these specified sequences of

tests, the circuit breaker is energized
in a reverse-feed configuration, and
the satisfactory completion of these
tests demonstrates their ability to
be used in reverse-feed applications.
Therefore, all low voltage power
circuit breakers that are listed per
UL 1066 may be reverse-fed.
Can be reverse-fed:
Low voltage power circuit breakers
that are listed per UL 1066 may be
reverse-fed
Special Application Considerations

Circuit Breakers With Integral
Ground-Fault Protection
Many of Eatons UL listed molded-case
and low voltage power circuit breakers
have design options and schemes
that allow for the detection and
interruption of unwanted groundfault currents. In these ground-fault
protection schemes, the means for
ground-fault detection are either
integral to the circuit breaker or
externally mounted.
The ground-fault detection means
commonly consist of current sensors
and control logic circuitry that may be
connected in various configurations
as follows:
1. Separate current sensors that
monitor each phase circuit and
the neutral circuit conductors, as
shown in Figure 27.3-10
2. One current sensor that monitors
all phases and the neutral circuit
conductors together (not shown)
3. One current sensor that monitors
the ground circuit conductor
(not shown)
The interruption of ground-fault
currents is done by the circuit breaker
opening all three-phase conductor
circuits at the same time, in response
to a trip signal from the ground-fault
detection means.
Therefore, whenever an unwanted
ground-fault condition exists, a UL
listed circuit breaker with ground-fault
protection will detect and interrupt the
ground-fault current flow.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 072

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers with External Ground-Fault/
Earth Leakage Accessories
22
Top Side of
Circuit Breaker
23
24
Power
Source
Circuit
Breaker
Three-Phase
Current Sensors
26
Electronic
Trip Unit
27
Bottom Side of
Circuit Breaker
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
There are ground-fault current detection schemes that

require sensitivity down to relatively low current levels,
typically as low as 30 mA. These products are called
ground-fault/earth leakage modules.
Neutral Circuit
Current Sensor
25
29
Neutral
Circuit
Conductor
Load
Control Logic
Circuitry
Ground-Fault
Detection Means
Figure 27.3-10. Circuit Breaker with Integral Ground-Fault Protection

In reverse-feed applications, while the primary phase
currents and the ground currents have been interrupted
with the opening of the circuit breaker, voltage at the circuit
breakers terminals may or may not cause damage to the
components of the ground-fault protection system. If
components in the detection means or control logic circuitry
of the ground-fault (or the phase current) protection system
may be damaged by reverse-feed connections, then the
circuit breaker must be marked accordingly. In this case,
where the circuit breaker with ground-fault protection is not
suitable for reverse-feed applications, the circuit breakers
terminals are marked with Line and Load to indicate the
required terminal connection points for the power supply
source (Line) and the load (Load).
Conversely, there are Eaton circuit breaker design configurations where the components in the ground-fault (or phase
current) protection system are unaffected by reverse-feed
connections, and are suitable for those applications. These
circuit breakers are not marked with Line and Load, to
indicate that they are suitable for reverse-feed connections
the power supply source may be connected to the terminals
at either end of the circuit breaker.
A circuit breaker with integral ground-fault protection may
be reverse fed if it is not marked with Line and Load.
The UL listed mark that is applied on this circuit breaker
with integral ground-fault protection indicates that it has
successfully met the UL test requirements for reversefeed applications.
Figure 27.3-11. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers with

Earth Leakage Modules
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers are available with
UL listed ground-fault (earth leakage) modules that are
typically mounted external to the bottom end of the
circuit breaker, as shown in Figure 27.3-11. These modules
are self-contained with a current sensor and logic control
circuitry all located inside the product. Depending on the
design configuration and construction of these earth leakage
modules, some of these products may or may not be
suitable for reverse-feed applications. Each product is
marked with a label containing text that describes their
suitability for reverse-feed applications, as shown in
Figure 27.3-12 and Figure 27.3-13.
General Rule
When either a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing
Line and Load, or the earth leakage module is
marked as unsuitable for reverse-feed, the power supply
conductors MUST be connected to the Line end of the
circuit breaker. These devices cannot be reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
If Line and Load are not marked on the UL listed
circuit breaker, and the earth leakage module is marked
as suitable for reverse-feed, the power supply conductors
may be connected to either end. These devices are
suitable for reverse-feed applications
General Rule
40
41
42
43
When a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing
Line and Load, the power supply conductors must
be connected to the end marked Line. These devices
cannot be reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
circuit breaker, the power supply conductors may be
connected to either end. These devices are suitable for
reverse-feed applications
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-41
Sheet 27 073
Miniature Circuit Breakers with Integral Ground-Fault

and Arcing-Fault Protection
Eatons molded-case circuit breakers are available with UL
listed ground-fault current protection levels that are able to
detect and trip on ground-fault currents as low as 5 mA for
personnel protection, and at 30 mA for sensitive electrical
equipment. Eaton also has circuit breakers that provide
low-level 30 mA arcing-fault protection in residential
applications. The constructions of these circuit breakers
are typically in a single-pole or two-pole configuration, and
with continuous ampere ratings of 15100A. Due to their
relative small size and low continuous ampere ratings, these
types of molded-case circuit breakers are commonly called
miniature circuit breakers.
The 5 mA designs for personnel protection are known as
ground-fault circuit interrupters (GFCI)
The 30 mA designs for equipment protection are known
as ground-fault equipment protectors (GFEP)
The circuit breaker designs for arcing-fault protection are
known as arc-fault circuit interrupters (AFCI)
Figure 27.3-12. Earth Leakage Module Suitable for

Reverse-Feed Applications
While the overall performance of the circuit breaker is

governed by UL 489 for molded-case circuit breakers, the
specific 5 mA personnel protection performance is per
UL 943 ground-fault circuit interrupters, and the specific
30 mA performance for sensitive electrical equipment is per
UL 1053, ground-fault sensing and relaying equipment. The
AFCI performance requirements are governed by UL 1699.
Figure 27.3-13. Earth Leakage Modules Not Suitable for

Reverse-Feed Applications
Note: The only acceptable combination of circuit breakers and earth
leakage modules that should be used in reverse-feed applications is
where BOTH 1) the circuit breaker is not marked Line and Load,
and 2) the earth leakage module is not marked Line and Load,
and not marked Do not reverse-feed.
For these AFCI, GFCI and GFEP ground-fault protection

designs, when the circuit breaker is closed, the control
power for the groundfault control logic circuitry is typically
connected to the Load side of the circuit breaker. Whenever a ground-fault condition occurs, the detection means
and control logic circuit will operate and cause the circuit
breakers main current-carrying contacts to open without
any intentional delay, and will interrupt the flow of the fault
current. This instantaneous trip minimizes electrical shock
hazards to personnel in GFCIs, and minimizes the flow of
potentially damaging currents to sensitive electrical equipment in GFEP applications. In addition to the interruption of
the ground-fault current, the detection means and control
logic circuitry also rely on the main current-carrying contacts
to open and disconnect the currents that flow though the
detection and trip system.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
Sheet 27 074
22
23
24
If power is applied to the Line terminals, and the load is

connected to the Load terminals in a normal feed
configuration, whenever the circuit breaker trips and the
main current-carrying contacts open, the ground-fault
current is interrupted and control power is also
disconnected from the detection means and control
logic circuitry of the ground-fault system, as shown
in Figure 27.3-14.
25
Power
Source
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Top Side of
Circuit Breaker
Neutral
Circuit
Conductor
Voltage Still
Present
Circuit
Breaker
Ground
Bottom Side of
Circuit Breaker
Ground-Fault
Detection Means and
Control Logic Circuitry
Control Power
Connection for Control
Logic Circuitry
No Voltage
Present
Bottom Side of
Circuit Breaker
Load
Circuit
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Contacts Open
Ground-Fault
Detection Means and
Control Logic Circuitry
Circuit Breaker
Contacts Open
28
29
Power
Source
Ground
Figure 27.3-14. Miniature AFCI, GFCI and GFEP Circuit Breaker

Connected in Normal Feed Configuration
When the circuit breaker trips and control power is
disconnected from the control logic circuitry, no further
current flows through the control logic circuitry to ground.
On the other hand, if power is applied to the Load
terminals, whenever the AFCI, GFCI, and GFEP circuit
breaker trips and the main current-carrying contacts open,
the ground-fault current is interrupted, but control power
continues to be applied to the ground-fault detection and
control logic circuit of the ground-fault system, as shown
in Figure 27.3-15. The presence of the control power will
cause current to continually flow through the control logic
circuitry. The effect of this continuous current may or
may not degrade the performance of the control logic
circuitry over time.
Control Power
Connection for Control
Logic Circuitry
Load
Figure 27.3-15. Miniature AFCI, GFCI and GFEP Circuit Breaker

Connected in Reverse-Feed Configuration
Depending on the design configuration, the ground-fault
detection means and control logic circuit of AFCI, GFCI,
and GFEP miniature circuit breakers may be affected by
this reverse-feed application. If the AFCI, GFCI and GFEP
circuit breaker is not able to be connected and applied in a
reverse-feed configuration, the terminals will be marked
Line and Load.
General Rule
When a UL listed circuit breaker is marked showing
Line and Load, the power supply conductors MUST
be connected to the end marked Line. These devices
cannot be reverse-fed
Can be reverse-fed:
circuit breaker, the power supply conductors may be
connected to either end. These devices are suitable to
be reverse-feed applications
Summary
Molded-case circuit breakers, UL listed per UL 489, have
specific test and marking requirements to demonstrate that
the circuit breaker is suitable for reverse-feed applications.
The capabilities of UL 1066 listed low voltage power circuit
breakers for reverse-feed applications are verified as part of
standard circuit breaker test sequences.
If a circuit breaker and molded-case switch are
marked Line and Load, it is not suitable for
reverse-feed applications
Only circuit breakers and molded-case switches
without Line and Load markings are suitable
for reverse-feed applications
Note: Warningfor all types of Eatons circuit breakers, do not

connect the power source to circuit breaker terminals marked Load.
43
CA08104001E

Application Data
December 2013
27.3-43
Sheet 27 075

Table 27.3-13. Reverse-Feed ApplicationsEatons Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Types Suitable for Reverse Feed
Circuit Breaker Types Not Suitable for Reverse Feed
Thermal-Magnetic QUICKLAG and Residential Breakers
GFCI, GFEP
BW, BWH, BWHH, CSR, CSH
AFCI
CA, CAH, CC, CCH, CHH
BABRP, BABSP, BRRP, CLRP
EB, EHB
GHBS, GBHS, GHQRSP
FB, HFB, FB TRI-PAC
KA, HKA
JA
KB, HKB
JB
LA, HLA
LBB, DA
LB, HLB
LAB
MA, HMA, MD
LC, HLC, etc.
NB, HNB
MC, HMC, etc.; MDS
PB
NC, HNC, etc.
LA, NB, PB TRI-PACs
PC, PCC, PCCG, PCF, PCCF, etc.
JD, HJD, JDC,
SPB
KD, HKD, KDC, CKD, CHKD
FCL, LCL
LD, HLD, LDC
SPCB
MDL, HMDL
GB, GHB, GC, GHC, GD, GD-K
JGE, JGS, JGH, JGC, JGU, JGX frames with interchangeable trip unit
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC
LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU with interchangeable trip unit
EHD, EHD-K, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, FD-K
GMCP
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
HMCP, HMCPE
JD, HJD, JDC sealed breakers
ELFD, ELHFD, ELFDC
JDB, HJDB, JDCB, JDB-K, HJDB-K
ELKD, ELHKD, ELKDC
DK, DK-K
ELJD, ELHJD, ELJDC
KD, HKD, KDC, CKD, CHKD sealed breakers
GHBGFEP, GHCGFEP
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
KDB, HKDB, KDCB, CKDB, CHKDB

KDB-K, HKDB-K
LD, HLD, LDC sealed breakers
33
LDB, HLDB, LDCB, CLDB, CHLDB, CLDCB

LDB-K, HLDB-K
34
MDL, HMDL sealed breakers

MDLB, HMDLB, CMDLB, CHMDLB
MDLB-K, HMDLB-K
35
ND, HND, NDC, NDU, CND, CHND, CNDC

ND-K, HND-K, NGS, NGH, NGC, NGU, NGK
RD, RDC, CRD, CRDC, RD-K, RD-N, RGH, RGC, RGK
E125, EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH, EGC
E125K, EGK switches
J250, JGE, JGS, JGH, JGC, JGU, JGX sealed breakers
36
37
J250K, JGK switches

L630, LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX sealed breakers
L630K, LGK switches
38
Magnum DS, Magnum SB, DS, DSII
39
Series NRX
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 076
22
This page intentionally left blank.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-1
Sheet 27 077
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breaker Overview Tables
QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
22
23
24
25
26
Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protectors
27
Table 27.4-1. Eatons QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit Breaker
Type Code
HQP
HQP
HQP
QPHW
QPHW
QPHW
QHPX
QHPX
QHPX
QHPW
QHPW
QHPW
QPGF
QPGF
QPHGF
QPHGF
QPGFEP
QPGFEP
QPHGFEP
BABRSP
BABRSP
BRRP
BRRP
CLRP
CLRP
BAB
BAB
BAB
BABRP
BABRP
QBAF
QBCAF
QBHW
QBHW
QBHW
QBHAF
QBHCAF
HBAX
HBAX
HBAX
HBAW
HBAW
HBAW
QBGF
QBGF
QBHGF
QBHGF
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P, GF
P, GF
P, GF
P, GF
P, GFEP
P, GFEP
P, GFEP
B
B
P
P
P
P
B
B
B
B
B
B, AF
B, AF, GF
B
B
B
B, AF
B, AF
B
B
B
B
B
B
B, GF
B, GF
B, GF
B, GF

Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
Number
of
Poles
Vac
1070
10125
10100
1570
15125
15100
1570
15100
15100
1530
1530
1520
1540
1550
1530
1550
1540
1550
1530
1530
1530
1530
1530
1530
1530
1070
10125
10100
1530
1530
1520
1520
1570
15125
15100
1520
1520
1570
15100
15100
1530
1530
1520
1540
1550
1530
1530
1
2
2, 3
1
2
2, 3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2, 3
1
2
1, 2
1, 2
1
2
2, 3
1, 2
1, 2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
1
120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
240
120
120/240
120
120/240
120
120/240
120
120
120/240
120
120/240
120
120/240
120/240
120/240
240
120
120/240
120/240
120/240
120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
120/240
120/240
240
120/240
120/240
240
120
120/240
120
120/240
Vdc
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 80
Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b
Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes

120
120/240
240
2448
62.5
80
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a
10b, 11b, 12b
14a
14a
14b
15a
15a
15b
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a
10b, 11b, 12b
14a
14a
14b
15a
15a
15b
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10a, 11a, 12a
10,000
22,000
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
42,000
65,000
65,000
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
42,000
65,000
65,000
10,000
22,000
10,000
22,000
42,000
65,000
10,000
22,000
42,000
65,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
Vdc Ratings
Vac Ratings
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 095% noncondensing.
Two-pole DC interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.
62.5 Vdc interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 1050A and 2500 AIC 55100A continuous.
Note: Circuit Breaker Type Codes: AF Arc Fault; P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
CA08104001E
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 078
22
Table 27.4-1. Eatons QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Plug-In, Bolt-On, Cable-In/Cable-Out (Continued)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit Breaker
Type Code
24
QBGFEP
QBGFEP
QBHGFEP
25
26
23
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
Number
of
Poles
Vac
B, GFEP
B, GFEP
B, GFEP
1540
1550
1530
1
2
1
120
120/240
120
QBHGFEP
QC
QC
B, GFEP
C
C
1530
1070
10100
2
1
2
QC
QCD
QCD
C
C
C
10100
1060
10100
QCF
QCF
QCF
C
C
C
QCR
QCR
QCR
Federal
Spec.
W-C-375b
Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes

120
120/240
240
2448
62.5
80
10,000
22,000
10,000
120/240
120/240
120/240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a
22,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
2, 3, 4
1, 2
2, 3
240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 62.5
10b, 11b, 12b
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
3000
3000
3000
3000
1060
1520
1530
1, 2
1, 2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
C
C
C
1060
1520
1530
1, 2
1, 2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 62.5
24, 48, 62.5
10,000
22,000
10,000
10,000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
QCHW
QCHW
QCHW
C
C
C
1570
15100
15100
1
2
2, 3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
14a
14a
14b
22,000
22,000
22,000
5000
5000
5000
QHCX
QHCX
QHCX
C
C
C
1570
15100
15100
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
42,000
42,000
42,000
5000
5000
QHCW
QHCW
QHCW
C
C
C
1530
1530
1520
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80
15a
15a
15b
65,000
65,000
65,000
5000
5000
5000
5000
QCGF
QCGF
QCHGF
C, GF
C, GF
C, GF
1540
1550
1530
1
2
1
120
120/240
120
10,000
22,000
10,000
QCHGF
QCGFEP
QCGFEP
C, GF
C, GFEP
C, GFEP
1530
1540
1550
2
1
2
120/240
120
120/240
10,000
22,000
10,000
QCHGFEP
QCHGFEP
C, GFEP
C, GFEP
1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
22,000
22,000

35
Vdc
Vdc Ratings
Vac Ratings
5000
5000
5000
QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 095% noncondensing.
62.5 Vdc interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 1050A and 2500 AIC 55100A continuous.
Note: Circuit Breaker Type Codes: AF Arc Fault; P Plug-In; B Bolt-On; C Cable-In/Cable-Out; GF Ground Fault, 5 mA; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 mA.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-3
Sheet 27 079

Table 27.4-2. Factory Modifications
Modification
Type
Breaker
Type
23
Shunt trip (requires one extra

pole space on right side)
120, 208, 240 Vac
12, 24, 48 Vac/Vdc
Draws 2.6A at 120V
Draws 11A at 24 Vdc
QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

S
S1
Special calibration (50C)

Shock testing
Freeze testing

V
L
Y
Moisture-fungus treatment
QUICKLAG Types P, B, C and

Ground Fault
QUICKLAG Types P, B, C
Marine duty
Naval duty
400 Hz calibration
Specific DC ratings
(breaker marked with
a maximum Vdc rating)
22
Catalog
Suffix
24
25
26
H08
H09
G
Q thru Q9
27
28
Contact the Eaton factory for modifications available for QCR and
QCF breakers.
29
Table 27. 4-3. Factory-Installed Breaker Terminals

Breaker
Type
Standard Load Terminal

Continuous Standard Line Terminal
Ampere
Terminal Wire Wire
Terminal
Rating
Type
Type Range (AWG) Type
Wire
Type
QUICKLAG Type P
HQP, QPHW,
QHPX, QHPW
1030
3550
55125
Plug-on female clips that

mate with the bus stabs
1
2
3
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 81/0
N/A
3
3
31
QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QPGF, QPHGF,
QPGFEP, QPHGFEP
1030
Plug-on female clips that

mate with the bus stabs
1 (single-pole)
4 (two-pole)
4
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 148
Cu
148
N/A
3
3
32
QUICKLAG Type B
BAB, QBHW,
HBAX, HBAW
1030
3550
55125
Extended tangs that bolt

directly to the bus
1 (single- and two-pole)

2 (three-pole)
3
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 81/0
N/A
3
3
QUICKLAG Ground Fault/Arc Fault

QBGF, QBAF, QBCAF, QBHGF,
QBHAF, QBHCAF, QBGFEP,
QBHGFEP
1030
Extended tangs that bolt

directly to the bus
1 (single-pole)
4 (two-pole)
4
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 148
Cu
148
N/A
N/A
QUICKLAG Type C
QC, QCHW,
QHCX, QHCW
1020
2560
70100
5
6
7
Cu/Al TBD
Cu/Al TBD
Cu/Al TBD
5
2
3
Cu/Al 1410
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 81/0
6, 7
5, 7
5
6, 7, 8
5, 6, 7, 8
5, 7, 8
QUICKLAG
QCR, QCF
1055
60
1
1
Cu/Al TBD
Cu
TBD
1
1
Cu/Al 144
Cu
144
N/A
N/A
QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP
1020
2550
5
6
Cu/Al TBD
Cu/Al TBD
1
1
Cu/Al 144
Cu/Al 144
6, 7
5, 7
5
5
QUICKLAG
QCD
1060
70100
9
10
Cu/Al 144
Cu
41/0
9
10
Cu/Al 144
Cu
41/0
See accessories
40
40
Optional Terminals
Wire
Line
Range (AWG)
Load
30
33
34
35
36
37
38
Steel Box Lug
Steel Box Lug
Steel Box Lug
Steel Ring Type
Aluminum Box Lug
39
10
40
Aluminum Box Lug
Aluminum Box Lug
4-Prong Quick Connect

Catalog Suffix P
QCD Terminal Assembly

1060 Amperes
Clamp on line side only.
QCD Terminal Assembly

70100 Amperes
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 080
Series G Industrial Breakers Overview Table
22
23
Table 27.4-4. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries G

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
Volts
AC
DC
Trip
Type
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

DC
AC Ratings Volts
120
120/ 240
240
277
480
600
125
250
125/
250
E-Frame
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
EGB
15125
1
347
2, 3, 4 600Y/347
EGE
15125
2, 3, 4 600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
EGS
15125
1
347
2, 3, 4 600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
N.I.T.
100,000
85,000 35,000
35,000
85,000
35,000 22,000
35,000
EGH
15125
1
347
2, 3, 4 600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
200,000
100,000 65,000
42,000
100,000
65,000 25,000
42,000
EGC
15125
250 N.I.T.
200,000
100,000
35,000
42,000
JGE
JGS
JGH
63250
63250
63250
2, 3, 4 600
2, 3, 4 600
2, 3, 4 600
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
65,000
85,000
100,000
25,000
35,000
65,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
JGC
JGU
JGX
63250
63250
63250
2, 3, 4 600
3, 4
600
3, 4
600
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
150,000
200,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
42,000
50,000
50,000
35,000
50,000
65,000
18,000
25,000
35,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
35,000
25,000 18,000
25,000
18,000
35,000
25,000
10,000
10,000
18,000 10,000 10,000
L-Frame
LGE
LGS
LGH
100600
100600
100600
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
250 I.T.
23a
23a
23a
65,000
85,000
100,000
LGC
LGU
LGX
LHH
100600
100600
100600
125400
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
N.I.T.
23a
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
6001200
6001200
6001200
2, 3, 4 600
2, 3, 4 600
2, 3, 4 600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
3
3
3
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
250 N.I.T.
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
100,000 100,000
150,000 65,000
200,000 65,000
65,000 35,000
42,000
50,000
50,000
22,000
85,000
100,000
200,000
50,000
65,000
100,000
25,000
35,000
45,000
300,000
100,000
150,000 75,000
65,000 35,000
125,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
N-Frame
NGS 800, 1200
NGH 800, 1200
NGC 800, 1200
NGU 800
NGS
NHH
6001200
1600
150350
R-Frame
RGH
RGC

37
J-Frame
36
600Y/347
250 N.I.T.
8001600
8001600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
50,000
65,000
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.

Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
Current limiting.
Not presently available for panelboard or switchboard mounting.
High instantaneous circuit breaker for selective coordination.
Not UL or CSA listed.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-5
Sheet 27 081
Series C Industrial Breakers Overview Table

Table 27.4-5. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries C
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
Volts
of
AC
Poles
Trip
Type
DC
125
N.I.T.
125/250 N.I.T.
125
N.I.T.
Federal
Specification AC Ratings Volts
DC
W-C-375b
120
120/
240
277
480
600
125
240
22
250
125/
250
23
G-Frame
GHB
GHB
GHB
15100
15100
15100
1
2, 3
1
120
240
277
GHB
HGHB
GHQ
15100
1530
1520
2, 3
1
1
GHQRSP
GHBS
GBHS
1520
1530
1520
GD
GD
GHC
GHC
GHC
GHC
HGHC
14,000
14,000
14,000
24
14,000
14,000
25,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
25
14,000
14,000
26
65,000
65,000
14,000
277/480 125/250 N.I.T.

277
125
N.I.T.
277
N.I.T.
15b
12c, 13a, 13b 65,000

12c, 13a, 13b 65,000
1
1, 2
1, 2
277
277/480
347/600
12c, 13a, 13b 65,000
65,000
65,000
1550
15100
15100
2
3
1
480
480
120
125/250 N.I.T.
250
N.I.T.
125
N.I.T.
13b
13b
12c, 13a
65,000
15100
15100
15100
1530
2, 3
1
2, 3
1
240
277
277/480
277
125/250
125
125/250
125
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
13b
12c, 13a
13b
65,000
EDB
EDS
ED
100225
100225
100225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
240
240
240
125
125
125
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
12b
12b
12b
EDH
EDC
EHD
100225
100225
15100
2, 3
2, 3
1
240
240
277
125
125
125
N.I.T.
14b
1
13a
EHD
FDB
FDB
15100
15150
15150
2, 3
2, 3
4
480
600
600
250
250
250
N.I.T.
13b
18a
18,000
18,000
18,000
FD
FD
FD
15225
15225
15225
1
2, 3
4
277
600
600
125
250
250
N.I.T.
13a
22a
35,000
65,000
35,000 18,000
65,000
35,000 18,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
FDE
HFD
HFD
15225
15225
15225
3
1
2,3
600
277
600
125
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
13a
22a
65,000
35,000 18,000
65,000
100,000
65,000 25,000
10,000
22,000
HFD
HFDE
FDC
15225
15225
15225
4
3
2, 3
600
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
100,000
100,000
200,000
65,000 25,000
65,000 25,000
100,000 35,000
22,000
22,000
FDC
FDCE
15225
15225
4
3
600
600
250
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
100,000 35,000
100,000 25,000
22,000
70250
70250
70250
70250
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
22a
22a
22a
22a
65,000
65,000
100,000
200,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
100,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
35,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
22,000
35,000 25,000
35,000 25,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
38
22,000
22,000
39
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
11a
10b, 11b,
12b, 14b,
65,000
65,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
14,000
27
14,000
14,000
28
10,000
10,000
10,000
30
100,000
200,000
14,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
31
65,000
14,000
22,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
25,000
14,000
14,000
F-Frame
24a
22,000
42,000
65,000
14,000
14,000 14,000
14,000 14,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
J-Frame
JDB
JD
HJD
JDC
29
32
33
34
35
36
37
K-Frame
DK
KDB
KD
250400
100400
100400
2, 3
240
2, 3
600
2, 3, 4 600
250
250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
14b
23a
23a
CKD
HKD
CHKD
KDC
100400
100400
100400
100400
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
23a

600
600
600
600
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
200,000

100% rated.
Current limiting.
Not defined in W-C-375b.
35,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
65,000
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 082
Series C Industrial Breakers Overview Table
22
23
Table 27.4-5. Industrial Circuit BreakersSeries C (Continued)

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
Volts
of
AC
Poles
DC
Trip
Type
Federal
Specification AC Ratings Volts
DC
W-C-375b
120
120/
240
277
480
600
125
240
250
125/
250
L-Frame
24
LDB
LD
CLD
300600
300600
300600
2, 3
600
2, 3, 4 600
2, 3, 4 600
250
250
250
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
25
HLD
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
300600
300600
300600
300600
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
23a
100,000
100,000
200,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
300800
300800
300800
300800
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
23a
23a
23a
23a
65,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
50,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
ND
CND
HND
6001200
6001200
6001200
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
23A
23A
23A
65,000
65,000
100,000
CHND
NDC
HNDC
NDU
6001200
6001200
6001200
6001200
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3
600
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
23A
23A
23A
100,000
200,000
200,000
300,000
26
27
28
29
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
35,000 25,000
35,000 25,000
35,000 25,000
22,000
22,000
35,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
35,000
22,000
25,000
50,000 25,000
50,000 25,000
65,000 35,000
35,000
65,000
65,000
75,000
M-Frame
MDL
CMDL
HMDL
CHMDL
N-Frame
65,000
100,000
100,000
150,000
R-Frame
31
RD 1600
CRD 1600
RD 2000
8001600
8001600
10002000
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
24a
24a
24a
125,000
125,000
125,000
65,000 50,000
65,000 50,000
65,000 50,000
32
RD 2500
CRD 2000
RDC 1600
10002500
10002000
8001600
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
24a
24a
25a
125,000
125,000
200,000
65,000 50,000
65,000 50,000
100,000 65,000
CRDC 1600 8001600

RDC 2000
10002000
RDC 2500
10002500
CRDC 2000 10002000
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
25a
25a
25a
25a
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
33
34

35
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000

100% rated.
Current limiting.
Table 27.4-6. Current Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit BreakersNon-Fused Type
36
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
AC
FCL
LCL
15100
125400
2, 3
2, 3
480
600
37
38

39
Volts
DC
Trip
Type
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b

120 120/240
240
277
480
600
125
250
125/250
200,000
200,000
150,000
200,000
100,000
DC
AC Ratings Volts

Table 27.4-7. TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit BreakersFused Type
40
Circuit
Breaker
Type
41
FB
LA
15100
70400
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
NB
PB
300800
6001600
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
42

Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40C
No.
of
Poles
AC
Volts
DC
Trip
Type
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b

120
120/240
240
277
480
600
125
250
125/250
DC
AC Ratings Volts

43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-7
Sheet 27 083
Current Limiting Industrial Breakers Overview Tables

Table 27.4-8. Eaton Molded-Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies
Frame
Ampere
Range
Panelboards
1A
2A
3A
3E
5P
Switchboards
Motor Control Centers
PRL-C
Freedom
IFS
FlashGard
Enclosed
Control
Bus
Plugs
Enclosed
Breaker
QUICKLAG
BAB
QB
QBH
15100
15100
15100
23
24
Series G
EG
JG
LG
15125
20250
100600
NG
RG
4001200
8002500
22
25
26
Series C
FD/ED
JD
KD
LD
MDL
ND
RD
15225
70250
70400
400600
300800
4001200
8002500
27
28
Current Limiting Breakers

FCL
LCL
FB
LA
NB
PB
15100
125400
15100
70400
300800
6001600
Including ground fault, arc fault and solenoid operated versions of each frame.
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 084
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Circuit Breakers with Microprocessor Trip Units
29
Table 27.4-9. Digitrip RMS Circuit Breaker Trip Unit Selection (See Table 27.4-10 for details)
Description
30
31
Digitrip
310
Molded-case F-Frame 225A
Molded-case JG250-Frame 250A
LD
Digitrip
610
Digitrip
810
Digitrip
910
OPTIM
1050
LG
Molded-case N-Frame 1200A
ND
NG
34
OPTIM
550
Molded-case L-Frame 600A

Molded-case M-Frame 800A
33
Digitrip
510
Circuit Breaker Type
Molded-case K-Frame 400A
32
Digitrip
310+
Molded-case R-Frame 2500A
RD
10
RG
Features
35
36
37
38
Curve shaping functions
Front adjustable
Harmonics
Waveform capture
Programmable
Zone selective interlocking
Load monitoring
Option
Diagnostics (cause-of-trip)
Option
Power/energy monitoring
Option
Option
Communications
39
40

41
Ground fault alarm

Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System (local and remote)

10
Option

Optional feature.
Requires ammeter/cause-of-trip display.
Requires cause-of-trip LED module or ammeter/cause-of-trip display.
Requires Power Metering and Monitoring Module (PM3). See Page 27.4-41 for product details.
Only available in LG, NG and RG breakers.
Requires auxiliary alarm module below R-Frames.
Note: For time current curves for the trip units, see www.eaton.com.
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-9
Sheet 27 085

Table 27.4-10. Molded-Case Digitrip Selection Guide
Trip Unit
Type
Digitrip
RMS 310+
Digitrip
RMS 310
Digitrip
RMS 510
Digitrip
RMS 610
Digitrip
RMS 810
Digitrip
RMS 910
Digitrip
OPTIM 550
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050
rms sensing
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FDE, JG, K , LG, NG,

RG
152500A
L, M
K, L, N
K, L, N, R
300800A
8005000A
8005000A
8005000A
8005000A
701200A
705000
35, 65, 100, 150 (kA)
35, 65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
35, 65, 100 (kA)
35, 65, 100 (kA)
Ordering options
LS
LSG
LSI
LSIG
LS
LSG
LSI
LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,

LSG, LSIG
LSI, LSI (A),

LSIG
LSI (A), LISG
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
No
ALSI
ALSIG
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Fixed rated plug (In)

Overtemperature trip
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
40100% frame
224 seconds
Yes
0.51.0(In)
10 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
0.51.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
0.41.0 x (In)
224 seconds
No
No
No
No
No
No
15 seconds
15 seconds
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
0.85 x Ir
Yes
0.85 x Ir
Yes
0.85 x Ir
Yes
0.51.0 x Ir
Yes
0.5-1.0 x Ir
200600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
150800%
x (Ir)
150800%
x (Ir)
Breaker Type
Frame
Ampere range
Interrupting rating
at 48V
Protection
Long Delay Protection (L)

Adjustable rating
plug (In)
Long delay pickup
Long delay time I2t
Long delay time I4t
Long delay
thermal memory
High load alarm
Short Delay Protection (S)

Short delay pickup
Varies by frame
200800% x (In)
Short delay time I2t

Short delay time flat
Yes
No
100 ms No
100500 ms
No
Inst300 ms 100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
100500 ms
Short delay time Z.S.I.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Optional
Yes
No
Inst300 ms
Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
No
Yes
200600%
200600%
200600%
200600%
200800%
M1 and M2 x (In) M1 and M2 x (In) M1 and M2 x (In) M1 and M2 x (In) x (In)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Var/frame
No
No
25100% x In
100500 ms
No
25100% x In
100500 ms
No
25100% x In
100500 ms
No
25100% x In
100500 ms
Inst500 ms
No
100500 ms
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Digital display
Current
Voltage
Power and energy
Power qualityharmonics
Power factor
Instantaneous pickup
No
Varies by
frame
Discriminator
No
Instantaneous override Yes
No
200800%
x (In)
200800%
x (In)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Yes
Yes
33
20/25100%
20/25100%
100500 ms
20/25100%
20/25100%
100500 ms
34
100500 ms
Yes
100500 ms
Optional
100500 ms
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes (over
Yes
PowerNet only)
No
No
Yes
Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground fault alarm
Ground fault pickup
Ground fault delay I2t
Yes
20100% frame
No
Ground fault delay flat Inst300 ms

Ground fault Z.S.I.
Yes
Ground fault
thermal memory
Yes
System Diagnostics
Cause of trip LEDs
Magnitude of
trip information
Remote signal
contacts
35
36
37
System Monitoring
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Optional
Yes
Test kit
Test set
Integral
Integral
Integral
Integral
OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
(optional)
OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
Testing
Testing method

No rating plugs necessary.

Only available on LG, NG and RG breaker.
Adjust by rating plug.
FDE and JG 2001200% x In
LG 2001200% x In
NG 200900% x In
RG 200800% x In
LS/LSG only.
CA08104001E

Not to exceed 1200A.

L- and N-Frames *20100% x Is.
R-Frame *25100% x In.
By OPTIMizer/BIM.
Yes, with addition of power monitoring/
metering module (PM3).
Yes, with addition of Energy Sentinel.
BIM
Is
In
Ir
39
40
Communications
PowerNet
38
=
=
=
=
Breaker Interface Module

Sensor Rating
Rating Plug
LDPU Setting x In
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 086
22
Digitrip OPTIM
Display information:
Breaker information
Time-current set points
Metered values
Trip event information
Test trip unit performance:

Phase and ground
Trip/no trip
23
24
25
Panel-Mounted User Interface

The breaker interface module can
be mounted directly on the assembly
or at a remote location and can be
used to access, configure and display
information from OPTIM trip units.
26
27
Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Accessories
28
General Description
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Digitrip OPTIM is a programmable

communicating microprocessor-based
electronic trip unit system for Eatons
molded-case circuit breakers. Digitrip
OPTIM trip units are available in
two models: Digitrip OPTIM 550 and
1050, for the K-, L-, N- and R-Frames
(702500A).
Digitrip OPTIM trip units are fully
programmable and can be applied as
a standalone breaker with a hand-held
Digitrip OPTIMizer programmer for
configuring the trip unit, displaying
information and testing. In addition,
OPTIM can be applied as a low voltage
assembly with a panel-mounted
Breaker Interface Module (BIM) to
configure, display and test. Alternatively, OPTIM can be applied as part of
a fully integrated IMPACC/PowerNet/
Power Xpert system. (See Tab 2.)
Features
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Fully programmable, rms sensing

trip unit
Available in K, L, N and R Series C
breakers
Available in 80% and 100%
rated breakers
Available in LSI, LSIG or LSIA
configurations
Advanced warning systems including

high load alarm, ground fault alarm
Full system diagnostics capability
System monitoring features including:
Phase currents (amps)
Power (kW)
Peak demand (kW)
Forward energy (kWh)
Reverse energy (kWh)
Total energy (kWh)
Power factor
Total harmonic distortion (%THD)
Magnitude of trip information
(amps)
Power Xpert communications saves
individual wiring of breakers
Complete initial system setup:

Select system frequency
(50/60 Hz)
Set system password
Configure the system:

Change time-current set points
Select protection options
Select alarm levels
Display information:
Breaker information
Time-current set points
Metered values
Trip event information
Test trip unit performance:

Phase and ground
Trip/no trip
Expanded energy monitoring:

Set addresses for group energy
monitoring
Group energy readings
Common alarm contacts:

Three Form C contacts
Saves wiring to each breaker
Local and remote indication:

Remote indication/alarming
Breaker status LED indication
Expanded communications:
Communicate with:
OPTIM trip units
Digitrip RMS 810
and 910 trip units
IQ Energy Sentinel
and Universal Sentinels
IQ Power Sentinels
A total of 50 devices
Hand-Held Programmer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer hand-held
programmer accesses, displays and
configures information from OPTIM
trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into
the front of the trip unit and is powered
by a nine-volt battery, or an auxiliary
power module.
An operator can use the OPTIMizer to:
Note: Ground fault alarm only.
Available in two models:

OPTIM 550 and OPTIM 1050
10 function time-current curve
shaping options, including a new
I4t long delay time or slope
Short delay and ground delay
Zone Selective Interlocking
(Optional on 550)
Additional programmable
protection features including
thermal memory and
discriminator functions
An operator can use the breaker

interface module to:
Complete initial system setup:

Select breaker address
Select system frequency
(50/60 Hz)
Set system baud rate
Set system password
Configure the system:
Change time-current set points
Select protection options
Select alarm levels
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-11
Sheet 27 087
Selection DataQUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
22
23
24
HQP, QPHW, QHPX
QPHW
QPGF, QPHGF,
QPGFEP, QPHGFEP
BAB, QBHW, HBAX
25
HBAW
26
Table 27.4-11. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections
Plug-On
Bolt-On
Thermal-Magnetic
HQP, QPHW, QHPX
Thermal-Magnetic
QHPW
Thermal-Magnetic
QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP,
QPHGFEP
Thermal-Magnetic
BAB, QBHW, HBAX
27
Thermal-Magnetic
HBAW
28
Circuit Breaker RatingsContinuous Current Rating at 40C and 095% Humidity (Noncondensing)
Amperes
Poles Volts
HQP
570
10150
10100
Amperes
Poles Volts
QHPW
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1520
1-2
3
120/240
240
QPHW
1570
15125
15100
Poles Volts
1540
1550
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1530
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1540
1550
Amperes
Poles Volts
BAB
1
2
120
120/240
QPHGF
QHPX
1570
15100
15100
Amperes
QPGF
570
10150
10100
Amperes
Poles Volts
29
HBAW
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1
2
2-3
120/240
120/240
240
1
2
3
120/240
120/240
240
1530
1520
1-2
3
120/240
240
1
2
120
120/240
1570
15125
15100
1
2
120
120/240
1570
15100
15100
1530
1530
1
2
120
120/240
1.00
(25.4)
3.19
2.38
(81.0) (60.3)
QPGFEP
31
HBAX
32
33
QPHGFEP
34
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker

W
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)
30
QBHW
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)
1.00
(25.4)
2.94
2.38
(74.6) (60.3)
35
AC Interrupting RatingsUL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts
Amps I.R. Volts
HQP
Amps I.R. Volts
QHPW
120/240, 240
10,000
Amps I.R. Volts
QPGF, QPGFEP
120/240, 240
65,000
QPHW
120, 120/240
10,000
QPHGF, QPHGFEP
120/240, 240
22,000
120, 120/240
Amps I.R. Volts
BAB
Amps I.R.
120/240, 240
10,000
120/240, 240
65,000
QBHW
22,000
QHPX
120/240, 240
42,000
120/240, 240
37
22,000
38
HBAX
120/240, 240
36
HBAW
42,000
DC Interrupting Ratings
Volts
Poles Amps I.R. Volts
Poles Amps I.R.
39
48
62.5
80
1-2
1
2
1-2
1
2
1-2
1
2
1-2
1
2
40
5000
2500
5000
48
62.5
80
5000
2500
5000
48
62.5
80
5000
2500
5000
48
62.5
80
5000
2500
5000
Accessories and ModificationsSee MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Dummy breaker
Optional terminals
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Dummy breaker
Optional terminals
Bell alarm contacts
Auxiliary switch contacts
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Panelboard accessories
Dummy breaker
Optional terminals
Two-pole interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed.
CA08104001E
Handle lock devices
Shunt trip
Special calibration
Shock tested
Panelboard accessories
Optional terminals
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 088
Selection DataQUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
QBGF, QBHGF,
QBGFEP, QBHGFEP
QCR,QCF
QC, QCHW,
QHCX, QCD
QHCW
QCGF, QCHGF,
QCGFEP, QCHGFEP
Table 27.4-12. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections
Bolt-On
Cable-In/Cable-Out
Thermal-Magnetic
Thermal-Magnetic
Thermal-Magnetic
Thermal-Magnetic
QBAF, QBGF, QBHGF,
QCR, QCF
QC, QCHW, QHCX
QCD
QBGFEP, QBHGFEP
Circuit Breaker RatingsContinuous Current Rating at 40C and 095% Humidity (Noncondensing)
Amperes
Poles Volts
Amperes Poles Volts
Amperes
Poles Volts
Amperes
Poles Volts
QBAF (Arc Fault)
QCR, QCF
QC
QCD
1020
1
120
1060
1
120
570
1
120/240
10100
1-2
120/240
1020
2
120/240
1060
2
120/240
10125
2
120/240
10100
3
240
1530
2-3
240
10100
2-3
240
QBGF
QCHW
1540
1
120
1570
1
120/240
1550
2
120/240
15100
2
120/240
15100
2-3
240
QBHGF
QHCX
1530
1
120
1570
1
120/240
1530
2
120/240
15100
2
120/240
15100
2-3
240
QBGFEP
QHCW
1540
1
120
1530
12
120/240
1550
2
120/240
1520
3
240
QBHGFEP
1530
1
120
1530
2
120/240
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker
W
H
D
W
H
D
W
H
D
W
H
D
1.00
3.19 2.38
.50
3.94 2.63
1.00
3.75 2.44
1.00
3.75 2.63
(25.4)
(81.0) (60.3)
(12.7)
(74.6) (66.7)
(25.4)
(95.3) (61.9)
(25.4)
(95.3) (66.7)
AC Interrupting RatingsUL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts
Amps
Volts
Amps I.R. Volts
Amps
Volts
Amps
I.R.
I.R.
I.R.
QBAF, QBGF, QBGFEP
QCR, QCF
QC
QCD
120, 120/240
10,000
120/240
10,000
120/240, 240
10,000
120/240, 240
10,000
QBHGF, QBHGFEP
QCHW
120, 120/240
22,000
120/240, 240
22,000
QHCX
120/240, 240
42,000
QHCW
120/240, 240
65,000
DC Interrupting Ratings
Volts
Poles Amps
Volts
Poles Amps
Volts
Poles Amps
I.R.
I.R.
I.R.
62.5
1
3000
48
1-2
5000
48
1-2
5000
125
2
3000
62.5
1
2500
62.5
1
2500
80
2
5000
80
2
5000
Accessories and ModificationsSee MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status
Moisture-fungus treatment Moisture-fungus treatment
Handle lock devices
Handle lock devices
Handle lock devices
Handle lock devices
Bell alarm contacts
QCR mounting clips
Shunt trip
Shunt trip
Ring terminals
Special calibration
Special calibration
Ring terminals
Quick connect
Shock tested
Shock tested
Terminals
Face mounting plate
Face mounting plate
Shunt trip
Base mounting hardware
Shock tested
Optional terminals
Optional terminals
DIN rail mounting clip
Dummy breaker
Dummy breaker
Thermal-Magnetic
QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP,
QCHGFEP
Amperes
QCGF
1540
1550
QCHGF
1530
1550
QCGFEP
1530
1550
QCHGFEP
1550
1530
W
1.00
(25.4)
Poles Volts
1
2
120
120/240
1
2
120
120/240
1
2
120
120/240
1
2
120
120/240
H
D
3.75 2.44
(95.3) (61.9)
Volts
Amps I.R.
QCGF, QCGFEP
120/240
10,000
QCHGF, QCHGFEP
120
22,000
Volts
Poles Amps I.R.
Handle lock devices
Bell alarm contacts
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-13
Sheet 27 089
Selection DataQUICKLAG Solenoid-Operated
Solenoid-Operated, RemoteControlled Latching Types

BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP
and CLRP
Features, Benefits and Functions
Bolt-on line-side terminal

(BABRP, BABRSPType BA)
Plug-on line-side terminal
(BRRPType BR, CLRPType CL)
Cable connected load-side terminal
Four-position control terminal
Bi-metal assembly for thermal
overload protection
Fast-acting short-circuit protection
Arc-chute assembly for fast-acting
arc extinction
Three-position handle: OFF, TRIP
(Center), ON
Handle permits manual switching

when control power is lost
Mechanical trip indicator
15 and 20A breakers SWD
(switching duty) rated
HID ratings for HID (high intensity
discharge) lighting
All models HACR rated
Status feedback of control circuit
(BABRSP)
Series rated (BABRP, BABRSP only)
BRRP series rated same as
BR breakers
BABRP, BABRSP same as
BA breakers
Product Selection
BABRP and BABRSP Breakers

Single- and Two-Pole
General Description
The BABRP and BABRSP are bolt-on
branch circuit breakers designed for use
in panelboards. The BRRP is a plug-on
branch circuit breaker designed for use
in loadcenters not manufactured with
breakers with a 1.00-inch wide format
and are listed on the Compatibility
list for Classified Applications
Pub. 26271. In addition to providing
conventional branch circuit protection,
they include a unique solenoid-operated
mechanism that provides for efficient
breaker pulse-on and pulse-off operation
when used with a suitable controller like
Eatons Pow-R-Command lighting
control system. These breakers can
also be controlled by pushbutton or
a PLC unit.
Application Description
Eatons BABRP, BABRSP, BRRP and
CLRP breakers are remotely operated
molded-case circuit breakers ideally
suited for lighting control applications
or energy management applications.
CA08104001E
23
24
25
26
27
28
Table 27.4-13. BABRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Number
of Poles
22
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

120/240
277/480
Catalog
Number
29
120
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRP1015
BABRP1020
BABRP1025
BABRP1030
30
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRP2015
BABRP2020
BABRP2025
BABRP2030
31
32
Continuous current rating at 40C.
33
Table 27.4-14. BABRP and BABRSP Wire Harness

Description
Catalog
Number
This 60-inch (1524.0 mm) wire pigtail provides a connection from a single
BABRPs control plug to a customers pushbutton, relay or PLC. Each box
contains 12 pigtails. Wires are 22 AWG, 600V. Order in multiples of 12.
SLBKRPTL1
34
35
Table 27.4-15. BABRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Number
of Poles
36

Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

120
120/240
277/480
Catalog
Number
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRSP1015
BABRSP1020
BABRSP1025
BABRSP1030
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BABRSP2015
BABRSP2020
BABRSP2025
BABRSP2030
37
38
39
40
Table 27.4-16. BRRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Number
of Poles

Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

120
120/240
Catalog
Number
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BRRP115
BRRP120
BRRP125
BRRP130
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
BRRP215
BRRP220
BRRP225
BRRP230
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 090
29
30
31
33
34
35
15
20
25
30
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
CLRP215
CLRP220
CLRP225
CLRP230
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc

(20.4V minimum30V maximum)
Controlled signal:
+AC/DC 8 ms minimum with zero
cross, 300 ms maximum
AC: 1.3 cycles minimum,
18 cycles or 300 ms maximum
DC: 8 ms minimum,
300 ms maximum
Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/
CLOSE cycles per minute
Operation
Tripping systemthe BABRP,
BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP circuit
breakers have a permanent trip
unit that contains a factory preset
thermal (overload) trip element in
each pole
Operating mechanismthe BABRP,
BABRSP, BRRP and CLRP circuit
breakers have an over-center toggle
mechanism that provides quickmake, quick-break operation. The
operating mechanism is trip free.
An internal cross-bar provides a
common tripping of all multi-pole
circuit breakers
Load
RM
b
Ambient temperature: 0 to 40C

Nominal pulse magnitude:
24 Vac/Vdc
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Maximum breaker cycling:
6 operations per minute
Tolerance: +10% to 15% of
nominal voltage
Humidity: 0 to 95% noncondensing
RM
a
On
Coil
Off Remote
Coil Status
BABRSP
Remote
Contact
Load
Line
Breaker
Contact
RM
b
Operating/Application Data
Line
Breaker
Contact
Blue
CLRP115
CLRP120
CLRP125
CLRP130
BABRP
Remote
Contact
Yellow
Current draw: open 1A, close 3/4A

Blue wire: power input (see power
requirements)
Black wire: remote opening
Red wire: remote closing
Yellow wire: feedback status from
power input, maximum 0.50A draw
(BABRSP only)
32
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
Solenoid Operating Data
28
Catalog
Number
15
20
25
30
Technical Data and Specifications
120/240
RM
a
BKR
a
On
Coil
Off Remote
Coil Status
Blue
27
120
Yellow
26
Vac (50/60 Hz)
Black
24
Ampere
Rating
Black
Red
Number
of Poles
23
25
Wiring Diagrams
Table 27.4-17. CLRP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
Red
22
Figure 27.4-1. Control Circuit for the BABRP

and BABRSP
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-15
Sheet 27 091
Solenoid Operated
Remote-Controlled Latching
for Type GHBS, GBHS and
GHQRSP Breakers

Cable-connected load-side terminal
Status switchremote status and
breaker status available from
internal auxiliary switches
overload protection
Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly
for fast-acting arc extinction
Three-position breaker handle: OFF,
TRIP (Center), ON
Visual indication of the remotely

operated contacts position
(open, closed or trip)
Remote override handle permits
manual switching when control
power is lost
15 and 20A breakers SWD
(switching duty) rated
15 and 20A breakers HID rated
for HID (High intensity discharge)
lighting
All models HACR rated
Series rated with various Eaton
main circuit breakers
22
23
24
25
26
27
Product Selection
Table 27.4-18. GHBS UL 489 Interrupting Ratings
Number
of Poles
GHBS and GHQRSP
Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

120
240
277/480
Catalog
Number
15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHBS1015D
GHBS1020D
GHBS1030D
15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHBS2015D
GHBS2020D
GHBS2030D
General Description
Eatons GHBS, GBHS and GHQRSP
circuit breakers are bolt-on branch
circuit breakers designed for use in
277/480 Vac panelboards. In addition
to providing conventional branch
circuit protection, they include a
unique solenoid-operated mechanism
that provides for efficient breaker
pulse-on and pulse-off operation
when used with a suitable controller
like Eatons Pow-R-Command lighting
control system.
28
Table 27.4-19. GBHS CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings (Not UL Listed)

Number
of Poles
30
31
32

Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

347/600
Catalog
Number
15
20
10,000
10,000
GBHS1015D
GBHS1020D
15
20
10,000
10,000
GBHS2015D
GBHS2020D
29
33
34
35
Table 27.4-20. GHQRSP UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings
36
Number
of Poles

Ampere
Rating
Vac (50/60 Hz)

120
120/240
277
480Y/277
Catalog
Number
15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHQRSP1015
GHQRSP1020
GHQRSP1030
15
20
30
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
14,000
GHQRSP2015
GHQRSP2020
GHQRSP2030


All UL listed circuit breakers are HID (high intensity discharge) rated.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 092
22
Wiring Diagrams
Solenoid Operating Data
23
24
25
26
27
28
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc (20.4V minimum

30V maximum)
Controlled signal: +AC/DC 8 ms minimum with zero
cross, 300 ms maximum
AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles or 300 ms maximum
DC: 8 ms minimum, 300 ms maximum
Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/CLOSE cycles
per minute
Blue wire: power input (see power requirements)
Yellow wire: feedback status from power input,
maximum 0.50A draw
Circuit Breaker
Solenoid
Solenoid
Common
AMP Inc.
Conductor
Plug
Auxiliary
/ Cycle
Maximum
28 Vac
Pulse Source
1 2
Circuit Breaker
Open/Closed
Status
28 Vac
Figure 27.4-2. Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram

for GHBS and GBHS Breakers
Operation
33
Line
Ambient temperature: 040C

Frequency: 4862 Hz
Humidity: 095% noncondensing
Table 27.4-21. Terminal Type

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Circuit
Breaker
Amperes
Screw
Head
Type
Terminal
Type
Range
GHQRSP
1520
Slotted
Clamp
#14#4 AWG
34
Status
On
Coil
Off
Coil
Blue
32
Load
Operating/Application Data
Black
31
GHQRSP
Remote
Breaker
Contact
Contact
Red
30
Mechanism manually operated by external handle allowing

ON, OFF and RESET operation. Handle assumes a center
TRIP position after performing protective response.
Yellow
29
Power
Input
35
36
37
Figure 27.4-3. Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram

for GHQRSP Breakers
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm).
Table 27.4-22. Dimensions Per Pole
38
39
Circuit Breaker
Type
Width
Height
Length
GHQRSP
1.00 (25.4)
4.63 (117.6)
2.81 (71.4)

Purchase separate AMP Inc. conductor plug #640426-3.

Excluding line terminal.
Excluding handle.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-17
Sheet 27 093
Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
Solenoid Operated
Remote Controlled
Emergency Circuit Breaker

Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly
for fast-acting arc extinction
Three-position breaker handle:
OFF, TRIP (Center), ON
Visual indication of the remotely
operated contacts position
(open, closed or trip)
Remote override handle permits
manual switching when control
power is lost
15 and 20A breakers SWD, and
HID rated
Product Selection
Table 27.4-23. Solenoid OperatedRemote
Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled

Emergency Circuit Breaker
General Description
GHQRSPEL2015
GHQRSPEL2020
Operating Data
15
20
GHQRSPEL circuit breakers incorporate

many of the same robust features as
other GHQRSP breakers including:
Solenoid
Power requirements: 24 Vac/Vdc

(20.4V minimum to 30V maximum)
Controlled signal: +AC/DC 12 ms
minimum with zero cross, 300 ms
maximum
AC: 1.3 cycles minimum, 18 cycles
or 300 ms maximum
DC: 12 ms minimum, 300 ms
maximum
Maximum duty cycle of 6 OPEN/
CLOSE cycles per minute
Blue wire: power input
Yellow wire: feedback status from
power input, maximum 0.50A draw
22
23
Product Specifications
Catalog
Number
Mechanism manually operated by

external handle allowing ON, OFF and
RESET operation. Handle assumes a
center TRIP position after performing
protective response.
Left pole: Integral solenoid

controlled contacts in series
with thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker pole
Right pole: Standard thermalmagnetic circuit breaker pole
Both poles tied to same phase
Cable-connected load-side terminal
Status switchremote status and
breaker status available from
internal auxiliary switches
overload protection
Ambient temperature: 040C

Frequency: 4862 Hz
Humidity: 095% noncondensing
Amperes
The GHQRSPEL circuit breaker

contains both a solenoid operated
remote switching circuit and a manually operated thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker. This Emergency Lighting
Circuit Breaker complies with the
2008 National Electrical Code; Section
700.12(F) for Sources of Power used in
emergency lighting applications.
Application
Handle rating: 20A (both switched

and unswitched circuits)
Maximum voltage rating: 277 Vac
Interrupting ratings: 65 kA at
240 Vac, 14 kA at 277 Vac
Maximum series connected
ratings: 200 kA at 240 Vac and
100 kA at 277V
Overcurrent protection
UL listed 489
UL listed switch duty rated (SWD)
and high intensity discharge
(HID) ratings
Lug wire size: (1) #128 Al, #148 Cu
per circuit, 75C conductors
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 094
Solenoid OperatedRemote Controlled Emergency Circuit Breaker
22
Wiring Diagrams
GHQRSPEL
Circuit Breaker
23
24
Manually Operated Circuit

Source
Remotely Operated Circuit
25
26
27
Light Fixture
Light Fixture
Light Fixture
Emergency
Light Equipment
Figure 27.4-4. The Need for Relay is Eliminated with Extra Box, Wiring and Selecting a Properly Rated Component
Note: Circuit breaker mounts into panelboard. Switched and unswitched conductors are connected directly to the breaker load side lug.
28
Remote
Contact
29
Breaker
Contact
Load
Line
30
31
32
35
36
Status
On
Coil
Off
Coil
Blue
Black
Red
34
Yellow
33
+
Power
Input
Figure 27.4-5. Typical Circuit Breaker Schematic for GHQRSP
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-19
Sheet 27 095
Series G Selection DataEG-Frame
Series G, E-Frame
Thermal-Magnetic
15125A
Table 27.4-26. UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit
Breaker
Type
22
Number Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)

of Poles Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
120 220240
Ics
25
25
25
25
Ics
18
18
18
EGE125
2, 3, 4
35
35
25
25
25
18
10
10
EGS125
1
2, 3, 4
100
85
85
43
43
35
22
40
30
35
22
35
35
35
35
EGH125
1
2, 3, 4
200 100
100
50
50
65
30
70
35
65
25
42
42
42
42
EGC125
3, 4
200
100
100
100 35
42

Icu
1
2, 3, 4
200
18
Volts DC
480 600Y/ 690

125
250
347
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
380415
EGB125
35
Icu
277 347
10
10
10
42
DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.

IEC only.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA.
10
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
E125-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-24. Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Number Width
of Poles
Height
1
2
1.00 (25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)

5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
3
4
3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)

4.00 (101.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
30
Depth
31
32
Table 27.4-25. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings

Frame
Ratings
33
EG
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,

60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
EG
34
16, 32, 63
Not UL listed.
35
Note: EG breaker is HACR rated.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 096
Series G Selection DataF-Frame
22
Series G, F-Frame 15225A

Electronic RMS 15225A
23
24

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles

Trip
Type Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC
FDE
HFDE
FDCE
3
3
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

25
100
150
225
33

Number Width
of Poles
250
10,000
22,000
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog Number
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #44/0
2.550
2595
2595
3T100FB
3TA150FB
3TA225FD
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
(1) #14#4
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #6300 kcmil
2.516
2.550
2595
16150
3TA50FB
3TA100FD
3T150FB
3TA225FDK
Package of
3 Terminals
Height
Steel
Aluminum
Aluminum
Depth
50
100
150
225
Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless steel
Aluminum
UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted.
4.13 (104.8) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
Table 27.4-28. Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units

Types
Frame
Ratings
FDE, HFDE,
FDCE
225
100, 110, 125, 150, 160,

175, 200, 225
160
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125,

150, 160
80
34
125
18,000
25,000
25,000
Optional Pressure Terminals
F-Frame Breaker
32
600
35,000
65,000
100,000
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
28
31
480
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit.

Current limiting.
Electronics available on thee-pole only.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
27
30
277
65,000
100,000
200,000
Table 27.4-30. Line and Load Terminals
26
29
240
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,

70, 80
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-21
Sheet 27 097
Series G Selection DataJG-Frame
Series G, J-Frame
Electronic RMS, 20250A
Thermal-Magnetic, 63250A

Circuit
Breaker
Type
380415
Icu
Ics
Icu
Icu
Ics
250
23
25
40
70
25
35
65
18
18
25
12
12
14
6
6
7
10
22
22
24
JGC250
JGU250
JGX250
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
200
200
200
200
200
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
35
50
50
16
18
18
12
14
14
42
50
50
25
DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.

Depth
4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)

5.34 (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
Frame
Ratings
JG
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175,

200, 225, 250
JG
160
26
JG-Frame circuit breakers include Cu/Al terminals T250FJ as standard.

When optional copper only terminals are required, order by catalog number.
27
28
250
250
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire
Range/Number
of Conductors
Catalog
Number
#4350 (1)
#4350 (1)
T250FJ
TA250FJ
#4350 (1)
TC250FJ
29
Stainless steel
Aluminum
Cu
Cu/Al
25185
25185
30
Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals

250

Copper
Cu/Al
25185
Single terminals individually packed.

Standard line and load terminals.
Contact factory for availability.
31
32
33
34
Not UL listed.
35
Ratings
100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250

JG250
JG160 63, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 160
Ics
690
25
40
70
JG100
JG50
600
J-Frame Breaker
Frame
480
65
85
100
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Volts DC
220240
65
85
100
2, 3
4
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
Height
22
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
JGE250
JGS250
JGH250
Number Width
of Poles
Number
of Poles
36
40, 45, 50, 63, 70, 80, 90, 100

20, 25, 30, 32, 40, 45, 50
37
Not UL listed.
Note: JG breaker is HACR rated.
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 098
Series G Selection DataLG-Frame
22
23
Series G, L-Frame
Electronic RMS, 100630A*
Thermal-Magnetic, 250630A*
*UL Maximum is 600A

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)

Volts DC
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

240240
380415
Icu
Ics
Icu
480
600
Ics
250
690
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
24
LGE630
LGS630
LGH630
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
65
85
100
65
85
100
35
50
70
35
50
70
35
50
65
18
25
35
12
20
25
6
10
13
22
22
42
22
22
42
25
LGC630
LGU630
LGX630
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
200
200
200
200
200
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
100
150
200
50
65
65
30
35
35
15
18
18
42
50
50
42
50
50
26

27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
L-Frame Breaker
Table 27.4-36. Dimensions in Inches (mm),

Weight in Lbs (kg)
Number Width
of Poles
Height
Depth
Weight
5.48
(140)
10.13
(258)
4.09
(104)
16
(7.3)
7.22
(183)
10.13
(258)
4.09
(104)
20
(9.1)
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Number of Catalog
Terminals Number
Included
400
400
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
500750 (1)
500750 (1)
240380 (1)
240380 (1)
3
4
3TA631LK
4TA631LK
400
400
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
500750 (1)
500750 (1)
240380 (1)
240380 (1)
3
4
3T631LK
4T631LK
630
630
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
2500 (2)
2500 (2)
35240 (2)
35240 (2)
3
4
3TA632LK
4TA632LK
630
630
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
2500 (2)
2500 (2)
35240 (2)
35240 (2)
3
4
3T632LK
4T632LK
400
400
Aluminum
Copper
Cu/Al
Cu
2500 (1)
2500 (1)
35240 (1)
35240 (1)
1
1
TA350LK
T350LK

Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers.

Standard terminal included with complete breaker.
Table 27.4-37. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Rating

Frame
Ratings
LG
LG
250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600

320, 630
Not UL listed.
Table 27.4-38. Digitrip 310+

Frame
37
DC rating applies to substantially non-inductive circuits.

Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits.
IEC rating is 300 kA at 240 Vac.
Ratings
LG_630 250, 300, 315, 350, 400, 500, 600, 630

LG_600 250, 300, 315, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
38
LG_400 160, 200, 225, 250, 300, 315, 350, 400

LG_250 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250
39
Note: 160, 315 and 630 are IEC ratings only.

LG breaker is HACR rated.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-23
Sheet 27 099
Series G Selection DataNG-Frame
Series G, N-Frame
Table 27.4-43. Series G Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit Number Trip
Breaker of Poles Type
Type
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

UL 489
240
IEC 60947-2
480
600
220240
380415
660690
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
800, 1200A
NGS
NGH
NGC
3
3
3
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65
100
200
50
65
100
25
35
50
85
100
200
85
100
100
50
70
100
50
50
50
20
25
35
10
13
18
N.I.T.
300
150
75
800A
NGU
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
23
24
25
26

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
22
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
(2) 1500 kcmil

(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(4) 4/0500 kcmil
(3) 500750 kcmil
50300
95185
120300
300400
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
TA1201NB1
27
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

700
1000
1200
1200
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
N-Frame Breaker

Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
8.25
(209.6)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
700
1000
1200
Copper
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
Cu
(2) 2/0500 kcmil

(3) 3/0500 kcmil
(4) /0400 kcmil
T700NB1
T1000NB1
T1200NB3
29
30
31
32
Table 27.4-42. Digitrip 310+ Electronic

Trip Units
33
Frame Ratings
800
1200
70300
95300
95185
28
320, 400, 450, 500, 600, 630, 700, 800

500, 600, 630, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 100
Series G Selection DataRG-Frame
22
Series G, R-Frame
23
Table 27.4-48. Series G Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit Number Trip
Breaker of Poles Type
Type
RGH
RGC
24
3, 4
3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

UL 489
240
125
200
IEC 60947-2
480
65
100
600
50
65
220240
380415
660690
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
135
200
100
100
70
100
50
50
25
35
13
18
25
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
26
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Hardware
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
Aluminum
Copper
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
English
English
English
(4) 5001000 kcmil

(4) 1600 kcmil
(6) 2600 kcmil
300500
50300
35300
TA1600RD
T1600RD
TA2000RD
Wire Terminal
1600
1600
2000
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
R-Frame Breaker

Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
15.50
(393.7)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)
20.00
(508.0)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)
Table 27.4-46. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit

Rating Plugs
Frame Rating Plugs
1600
2000
2500
35
36
37
800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1500, 1600

1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000
1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500
Adjustable rating plug available.
Table 27.4-47. Digitrip 510/610/810/910

and Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
1600
2000
2500
800, 1000, 1200, 1600

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
1600, 2000, 2500
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-25
Sheet 27 101
Series C Selection DataG-Frame
Series C, G-Frame
22
23
24
25
26
GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP277V 30 mA GF Breaker
Table 27.4-50. G-FrameDimensions in Inches (mm)

Number of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
1P G-Frame
2P G-Frame
3P G-Frame
1.00 (25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
3.00 (76.2)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
2.81 (71.4)
2.81 (71.4)
2.81 (71.4)
GHCGFEP
GHBGFEP
2.00 (50.8)
2.00 (50.8)
4.88 (124.0)
4.00 (101.6)
2.81 (71.4)
2.81 (71.4)
Frame
Ratings
GHB, GHC
GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
GHQ
HGHB
15, 20
15, 20, 25, 30

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

120
240
277
480
480Y/277
125
250
GDB
GD
GD
2, 3
2
3
65
65
14
14
22
10
10
10
GHQ
GHB
GHB
1
1
2, 3
65
65
65
14
14
14
14
14
HGHB
GHC
GHC
HGHC
1
1
2, 3
1
65
65
65
65
25
14
25
14
14
14
14
14

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
27
Application Notes
GHB Breaker and G-Frame
Volts DC
Type GHB are bolt-on panelboard breakers while type

GHC is a cable-in and cable-out breaker for stand-alone
mounting typically in a control panel or separate enclosure
GHCGFEP and GHBGFEP are earth leakage breakers,
rated for 30 mA ground fault protection
On all three-phase delta (240V) grounded B phase
applications, refer to Eaton
480Y/277V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for
three-phase delta (480V) grounded B phase applications
All two- and three-pole circuit breakers are of the common
trip type
Single-pole circuit breakers, 15 and 20A. Switching duty
rated (SWD) for fluorescent lighting applications
Suitable for reverse-feed applications
HACR rated
29
30
31
32
33
Terminals
Line side (on GHC) and load side (on GHC and GHB) terminals
are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound .
Table 27.4-54. Terminals
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Range
1520
2560
Clamp
Pressure
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
#14#10 AWG
#10 1/0 AWG
34
35
36
37
Single
38
Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.

Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
1570A breakers only.
39
Table 27.4-53. Terminal Types

Circuit Breaker
Amperes
Terminal Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
1520
25100
Clamp (plated steel)

Pressure (aluminum body)
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #1410
(1) #101/0
1520
2560
Clamp
Pressure
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #14#10 AWG

(1) #101/0 AWG
Figure 27.4-6. Electrical Schematic
28
40
Do not ground neutral anywhere on load side of breaker.
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 102
Series C Selection DataF-Frame
22
23
Series C, F-Frame
Thermal-Magnetic 10225A
Electronic RMS 15225A
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
F-Frame Breaker
Number Width
of Poles
Height
Depth
1
2
1.38 (34.8)
2.75 (69.9)
6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)

6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
3
4
4.13 (104.8) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)

5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7)
Ratings
100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
34
EHD, FDB, FD,

HFD, FDC,
HFDDC
10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45,

50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110,
125, 150
35
FD, HFD, FDC
175, 200, 225
38
EDB
EDS
2, 3
2, 3
N.I.T.
ED
EDH
EDC
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
EHD
1
2, 3
Types
Frame
Ratings
FDE, HFDE,
FDCE
225
100, 110, 125, 150, 160,

175, 200, 225
160
80
Trip
Type Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC
277
480
600
125
250
22,000
42,000
10,000
10,000
N.I.T.
65,000
100,000
200,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
N.I.T.
18,000
14,000
14,000
10,000
10,000
240
FDB
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
18,000
14,000
14,000
10,000
FD
FD
FDE
1
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
65,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
18,000
10,000
10,000
HFD
HFD
HFDE
1
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
100,000
100,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
25,000
10,000
22,000
FDC
FDCE
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
200,000
100,000
35,000
25,000
22,000
HFDDC
N.I.T.
42,000

ED, EDH, EDC
37
Number
of Poles
Frame
36
Circuit
Breaker
Type
33

Current limiting.
Electronics available on three-pole only.
HFDDC is UL only and is not tested to other standards.
Interrupting rating is 35,000A at 600 Vdc with three poles in series, for ungrounded systems only.

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog Number
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #14#10
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #44/0
2.54
2.550
2595
2595
3T20FB
3T100FB
3TA150FB
3TA225FD
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
(1) #14#4
(1) #141/0
(1) #44/0
(1) #6300 kcmil
2.516
2.550
2595
16150
3TA50FB
3TA100FD
3T150FB
3TA225FDK
Package of
3 Terminals

20 (EHD)
100
150
225
Steel
Steel
Aluminum
Aluminum
Optional Pressure Terminals

50
100
150
225

Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
Aluminum

Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125,

150, 160
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
70, 80
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-27
Sheet 27 103
Series C Selection DataJ-Frame
Series C, J-Frame

Number
of Poles
JDB
JD
HJD
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
65,000
100,000
JDC
HJDDC
2, 3, 4
3
I.T.
I.T.
200,000

Trip
Type
22
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

240
Volts DC
600
250
600
35,000
35,000
65,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
10,000
10,000
22,000
100,000
35,000
22,000
42,000
35,000
480
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip.

Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
8 milliseconds time constant.
Current limiting.

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
J-Frame Breaker
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
Cu/Al
Cu
(1) #4350 kcmil

(1) #4350 kcmil
25185
25185
TA250KB
T250KB
Number
of Poles
Width
Depth
2, 3
4.13
(104.8)
10.00
(254.0)
4.06
(103.2)
5.50
(139.7)
10.00
(254.0)
4.06
(103.2)
250
250

Aluminum
Stainless steel
Ratings
JDB, JD, HJD

JDC, HJDDC
70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,

225, 250
25
26
27
28
30
31
32

Frame
24
29

Height
Terminal
Body
Material
23
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 104
Series C Selection DataK-Frame
22
Series C, K-Frame
Table 27.4-68. NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
24
DK
KDB
KD
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
I.T.
25
HKD
KDC
HKDDC
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3
CKD
CHKD
3
3
23
26

27

28

29
31
32
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC
480
600
250
600
65,000
65,000
65,000
35,000
35,000
25,000
25,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
100,000
200,000
65,000
100,000
35,000
65,000
22,000
22,000
42,000
35,000
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
100,000
35,000
65,000
25,000
35,000
240

Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
8 milliseconds time constant.
Current limiting.
100% rated.

K-Frame Breaker
30
Trip
Type

Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2, 3
5.50
(139.7)
10.13
(257.2)
4.06
(103.2)
7.22
(183.4)
10.13
(257.2)
4.06
(103.2)
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/Wire
Range/Number
Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
TA300K
TA350K

225
350
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
3350 (1)
250500 (1)
35185
120240
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0250 (2)
95120
2TA400K
3TA400K
4TA400K
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

Frame
Ratings
225
350
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
3350 (1)
50500 (1)
35185
120240
T300K
T350K
400
Copper
Cu
3/0250 (2)
95120
2T400K
3T400K
4T400K
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2/0250 (2)
or
2/0500 (1)
70120
70240
70240
2TA401K
3TA401K
4TA401K
DK, KDB, KD, HKD, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,

KDC, HKDDC,
225, 250, 300, 350, 400
Table 27.4-66. Digitrip 310+ Electronic

Trip Units
Frame
Ratings
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
500750 (1)
300400
KD, CKD, HKD,

CHKD, KDC
55, 60, 70, 90, 100, 110, 125,

150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250,
300, 315, 350, 400
2TA402K
3TA402K
4TA402K
400
Copper
Cu/Al
500750 (1)
2T402K
3T402K
4T402K
Table 27.4-67. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip

Unit Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
KD, CKD, HKD,

CHKD, KDC
70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150,

175, 200, 225, 250, 300,
350, 400

Individually packed.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
Two-pole kit.
Three-pole kit.
Four-pole kit.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers.
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-29
Sheet 27 105
Series C Selection DataL-Frame
Series C, L-Frame

Number
of Poles
LDB
LD, CLD
HLD
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
65,000
65,000
100,000
CHLD
LDC
CLDC
HLDDC
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
100,000
200,000
200,000

L-Frame Breaker
Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2, 3
8.25
(209.6)
10.75
(273.1)
4.06
(103.2)
11.00
(279.4)
10.75
(273.1)
4.06
(103.2)

Ratings
LDB, LD, CLD,

HLD, CHLD,
LDC, CLDC,
HLDDC
300, 350, 400, 450,

500, 600
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

240
Volts DC
600
250
600
35,000
35,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
22,000
22,000
25,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
35,000
50,000
50,000
30,000
42,000
35,000
480
22

L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum.
Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
Incorporating T/M trip unit only.
100% rated.
Current limiting.
23
24
25
26
27
28
Frame
Trip
Type
Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/
Number of
Conductors
Metric
Wire Range
(mm2)
29
Catalog
Number
30

(two-pole kit)
(three-pole kit)
(four-pole kit)
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
(1) 4/0600 kcmil
120300
2TA401LDK
3TA401LDK
4TA401LDK
500
600
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(2) 250350 kcmil

(2) 400500 kcmil
120150
185240
TA602LD
2TA603LDK (two-pole kit)
3TA603LDK (three-pole kit)
4TA603LDK (four-pole kit)
120150
T602LD
Optional Copper Pressure Type Terminals

600

Copper
Cu
(2) 250350 kcmil

Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.

Rating Plugs
31
32
33
34
Frame
Rating Plugs
35
LDB, LD, CLD,

HLD, CHLD,
LDC, CLDC
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600

300/600 adjustable
36
37

Unit Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
LD, CLD, HLD,

CHLD, LDC,
CLDC
70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175,

200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400,
500, 600
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 106
Series C Selection DataM-Frame
22
23
Series C, M-Frame
24

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type
MDL, CMDL
HMDL, CHMDL
2, 3
2, 3
N.I.T.
N.I.T.

25

26
Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Volts DC
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

240
480
600
250
65,000
100,000
50,000
65,000
25,000
35,000
22,000
25,000

Two poles or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL,
HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated.
100% rated. Not for use on DC.

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
27
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Catalog
Number
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(2) #1500 kcmil

(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(2) 500750 kcmil
TA700MA1
TA800MA2
TA801MA
(2) 2/0500 kcmil

(3) 3/0300 kcmil
T600MA1
T800MA1

600
800
800
28
29
M-Frame Breaker
30
31
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum

Width
Height
8.25 (209.6)
16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.2)
600
800

Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
Depth
32
33
34
35
Frame
Ratings
MDL
300, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800

Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
MDL
400, 500, 600, 700, 800,

400/800 adjustable
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-31
Sheet 27 107
Series C Selection DataN-Frame
Series C, N-Frame

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type
240
277
ND, CND
HND
CHND
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65,000
100,000
100,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
NDC
CNDC
NDU
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
200,000
200,000
300,000
100,000
100,000
150,000

Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

480
600
24
65,000
65,000
75,000
25

Width
Height
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
(2) 1500 kcmil

(3) 3/0400 kcmil
(4) 4/0500 kcmil
(3) 500750 kcmil
50300
95185
120300
300400
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
TA1201NB1
N-Frame Breaker
Number
of Poles
Wire
Type
Depth
700
1000
1200
1200
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
26
27

Terminal
Body
Material
23
25,000
35,000
35,000

100% rated.
800A maximum rating.
Successfully tested at 300 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 200 kAIC at 240 Vac.
Successfully tested at 75 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kAIC at 600 Vac.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
22
28
29
30

2, 3
8.25
(209.6)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
11.13
(282.6)
16.00
(406.4)
5.50
(139.7)
700
1000
1200

Copper
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
Cu
(2) 2/0500 kcmil

(3) 3/0500 kcmil
(4) 3/0400 kcmil

Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
800
1200
400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800

600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100,1200
Rating Plugs
400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200
31
32
34

Unit Rating Plugs
800
1200
T700NB1
T1000NB1
T1200NB3
33
Frame
70300
95300
95185
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 108
Series C Selection DataR-Frame
22
Series C, R-Frame
23
24

Circuit
Breaker
Frame
Number
of Poles
Trip
Type
RD
CRD
RDC
CRDC
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
25
1600
1600
2000
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
277
480
600
125
125
200
200
65
65
100
100
50
50
65
65
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Hardware
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range (mm2)
Catalog
Number
Aluminum
Copper
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu
Cu/Al
English
English
English
(4) 5001000 kcmil

(4) 1600 kcmil
(6) 2600 kcmil
300500
50300
35300
TA1600RD
T1600RD
TA2000RD
Wire Terminal
28
31
240

100% rated versions.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
27
30
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
26
29
R-Frame Breaker

Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
15.50
(393.7)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)
20.00
(508.0)
16.00
(406.4)
9.75
(247.7)

Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
1600
800, 1000, 1200, 1250,

1400, 1500, 1600
2000
1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000
2500
1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500
Table 27.4-88. Digitrip 510/610/810/910

and Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit
Rating Plugs
Frame
Rating Plugs
1600
2000
2500
800, 1000, 1200, 1600

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
1600, 2000, 2500
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-33
Sheet 27 109
Series G Accessories and Modifications

Table 27.4-91. Series G Breaker Accessories and Modifications
Breaker Frame
Internal
22
Accessories
Alarm lockout (make/break)
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
Shunt trip
Control wire kit
Multi-wire kit
End cap kit
Terminal cover
Terminal shields
Interphase barriers
Handle mechanisms
26
Electrical operator
Drawout cassette
Earth leakage/ground fault protector
Power monitoring and metering module
Cause-of-Trip LED module
Ammeter/Cause-of-Trip display
DIgitrip 310+ test kit
Rear connecting studs

Plug-in adapters
32
33
34
35
Moisture fungus treatment
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB
31
Modifications
29
30
Sliding bar/walking beam interlock
Key interlock kit
27
Padlockable handle lock hasp
Padlockable handle block
25
28
Handle extension
Non-padlockable handle block
24
Terminal end covers
23
Only one per pole.

Refer to the Eaton.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 110
Series C Breaker Accessories and Modifications
22
Table 27.4-92. Series C Breaker Accessories and Modifications

Breaker Frame
Termination Accessories
23
Line and load terminals
Plug nut
24
25
26
34
35
36
Interphase barriers
Multiwire connectors
38
39
40
41
42
Alarm lockout (1 make/1 break)
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)/alarm lockout
Low energy shunt trip
Key interlock kit
Sliding bar interlock
Walking beam interlock
Electrical (solenoid) operator
IQ Energy Sentinel
LFD current limiter
Plug-in adapters
Electrical (motor) operator
Drawout cassette
Rear connecting studs
Door hardware/accessories
Solid-state (electronic) test kit
Handle mechanisms
Handle extension
Ammeter/Cause-of-Trip display
Cause-of-Trip LED module
Power monitoring and metering module (PM3)
Digitrip 310+ test kit
Modifications
Special calibration
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
Marine application

43
Panelboard connecting straps
37
Terminal shields
Cylinder lock
33
32
31
Standard shunt trip
30
29
28
Control wire terminal kit
27
Make only (one pole).

Requires two breakers.
Refer to the Eaton.
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-35
Sheet 27 111
High Instantaneous Breakers
High Instantaneous
Circuit Breaker for
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker
General Description
Eatons Electrical Sector introduces
new high-magnetic withstand moldedcase circuit breakers, specifically
designed for critical operations and
selective coordination requirements.
The high-magnetic withstand LHH
and NHH frames continue the legacy
of circuit breaker innovation for which
Eaton is recognized throughout the
world. The LHH and NHH breakers
are equipped with 125 to 400A trip
units with high-magnetic capability.
This design enables the breakers
to withstand up to 90 times rated
current before opening under shortcircuit conditions.
The LHH and NHH circuit breakers
incorporate a higher level of instantaneous pickup, thus allowing for higher
current levels of selective coordination.
Standard molded-case circuit breakers
typically are furnished with a magnetic
pickup or electronic instantaneous
adjustment or instantaneous override
set at 10 times (10x) the continuous
trip rating.

Eatons LHH and NHH molded-case
circuit breakers are furnished with a
higher level of magnetic pickup or
electronic instantaneous settings
as indicated in Table 27.4-95. These
higher levels of magnetic pickup and
electronic instantaneous values
in turn allow the system designer to
obtain selective coordination at fault
current levels up to these higher ratings.
Greater values of selective coordination
are available based on manufacturer
tested combinations using the LHH
and NHH as line-side breakers and
standard breakers as load-side devices.
Refer to IA01200002E to determine the
maximum fault values that selective
coordination achieves. When the lineside and load-side molded-case circuit
breaker trip ratings are chosen to
coordinate in the overload range, they
also can be selectively coordinated in
the fault range up to the values listed
in Table 27.4-95 or IA01200002E. For
overcurrents protected by circuit
breakers on the load-side of the LHH or
NHH, only the effected load-side circuit
breaker will open, while the line-side
LHH and/or NHH circuit breakers remain
closed, thus providing continuity of
power to the other critical loads supplied
by the LHH or NHH circuit breakers.
Benefits of Using the LHH and

NHH Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Customer expectations and codes
are driving product development to
protect customers critical operations.
NEC 2005 and 2008 requires circuits
with elevators, emergency systems,
legally required standby systems,
health care essential systems and
critical operation power systems to be
selectively coordinated. Simply stated,
only the closest protective device
directly protecting the circuit having

an overcurrent (overload or fault)
condition should open.
All other overcurrent protective
devices within these systems shall
remain closed. Similarly, backup
power system designs of a critical
nature that are not code mandated may
also require overcurrent protective
devices to be selectively coordinated
as much as practicable to provide a
higher level of uptime.
Proven Technology and Performance

The LHH is based on the Series G
L-Frame circuit breaker, sharing the
same small footprint and field-fit
accessories as the L-Frame breaker.
The NHH is based on the Series G
N-Frame circuit breaker and shares the
same footprint and accessories as the
N-Frame breaker. NHH accessories
must be factory installed.
The LHH incorporates a thermalmagnetic trip unit with fixed thermal
and fixed magnetic settings. The NHH
has an OPTIM electronic trip unit
with LSI adjustment capabilities. The
instantaneous setting is adjustable
from 1000 to 4000A or may be turned
off to default to the frame override
of 14,000A. A hand-held OPTIMizer
must be used with the NHH to adjust
short-time delay and instantaneous;
however, the long delay pickup is
fixed and cannot be adjusted.
The LHH and NHH breakers are
available in Eatons panelboards
and switchboards.
Standards and Certifications

UL
CSA
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Product Selection
38
Table 27.4-93. LHH and NHH Catalog Numbers

Ampere
Rating
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
LSI Electronic Trip Unit
LHH Frame
NHH Frame
39
125
150
175
LHH3125FFG
LHH3150FFG
LHH3175FFG
NHH3150T52X15
NHH3175T52X15
40
200
225
250
LHH3200FFG
LHH3225FFG
LHH3250FFG
NHH3200T52X15
NHH3225T52X15
NHH3250T52X15
41
300
350
400
LHH3300FFG
LHH3350FFG
LHH3400FFG
NHH3300T52X15
NHH3350T52X15
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 112
22
LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics
Three-pole
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125400A LHH
150350A NHH
Trip units:
LHHthermal-magnetic
NHHLSI electronic trip unit
Table 27.4-94. Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Description
NHH
400
350
100
65
35
42
100
65
35
220 Vac
415 Vac
690 Vac
125/250 Vdc
100
70
25
22
100
70
25
Number of poles
Ampere range
3
125400
3
150350
Max. rated current (amperes)
NEMA UL 489
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
250 Vac
IEC 60947-2
No rating plugs required

Factory-sealed breakers
LHH uses same internal and
external accessories as standard
Series G L-Frame circuit breaker
NHH uses same internal and
external accessories as standard
Series G N-Frame circuit breaker
Breaker Type
LHH
Table 27.4-95. Continuous Current Ratings

Continuous
Current
Rating
Amperes
LHH
Magnetic
Trip Point
Amperes
Continuous
Current
Multiplier
NHH
Instantaneous
Trip Point
Amperes
Continuous
Current
Multiplier
Short Delay
Pickup
Amperes
125
150
175
2500
2500
4000
20x
16x
22x
14,000
14,000
93x
80x
2251200
2601400
200
225
250
4000
6000
6000
20x
26x
24x
14,000
14,000
14,000
70x
62x
56x
3001600
3381800
3752000
300
350
400
6000
6000
6000
20x
17x
15x
14,000
14,000
47x
40x
4502400
5252800
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-37
Sheet 27 113
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
22
Table 27.4-96. Dimensions

Description
Height
Width
Depth
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
LHH
NHH
10.13 (257.3)
16.00 (406.4)
5.48 (139.2)
8.25 (209.5)
4.09 (103.9)
5.50 (139.7)
12.36 (5.6)
46.80 (21.2)
4.06
(103.1)
3.16
(80.3)
5.58
141.7)
10.13
(257.3)
1.92
(48.8)
2.00
(50.8)
2.69
(68.3)
26
27
28
29
5.38
(136.7)
Front Cover Cutout
24
25
CL Breaker
2.43
(61.7)
R 0.25
(6.4)
23
Front View Four-Pole
30
Side View
Figure 27.4-7. L-Frame
31
CL Breaker
32
3.44
(87.4)
R 0.25
(6.4)
33
1.91
(48.5)
9.25
(235.0)
16.00
(406.4)
1.50
(38.1)
3.68
(93.5)
3.19
(81.0)
34
35
8.25
(209.6)
5.50
(139.7)
Front View Three-Pole
Side View
36
6.38
(162.1)
Front Cover Cutout
37
38
Figure 27.4-8. N-Frame
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 114
22
Motor Circuit Protectors, 31200A
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Motor Circuit Protectors 31200A
Catalog Numbering System

Note: This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers
for circuit breakers or trip units.
Table 27.4-97. HMCP
31
Table 27.4-98. GMCP/HMCPE
HMCP 003 A0 C
GMCP/HMCPE 003 A0 C
32
Motor Circuit
Protector Type
33
HMCP = 3-pole
HM2P = 2-pole
HMCPS= 3-pole
34
Continuous
Ampere Rating
35
003 = 3
007 = 7
015 = 15
025 = 25
030 = 30
050 = 50
070 = 70
100 = 100
150 = 150
250 = 250
400 = 400
600 = 600
800 = 800
12 = 1200
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Motor Circuit
Protector Type
Magnetic Trip Range/

NEMA Starter Size
A0 = 930/0
C0 = 2170/0
E0 = 45150/0
D0 = 4060/0
H1 = 90300/1
G2 = 80120/2
K2 = 150500/2
J2 = 115170/2
M2 = 210700/2
L3 = 160240/3
R3 = 3001000/3
T4 = 4501500/4
U4 = 7502500/4
A5 = 350700/5
C5 = 450900/5
Non-aluminum terminals
W/O terminals
Load terminals only
Line terminals only
Stainless steel terms
(150A frame only)
No Suffix = Standard terminals on
line and load
(electronic)
On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.
=
=
=
=
=
GMCP = 3-pole
HMCPE = 3-pole
D5 = 5001000/5
F5 = 6251250/5
G5 = 7501500/5
J5 = 8751750/5
K5 = 10002000/5
L5 = 11252250/5
W5 = 12502500/5
N5 = 15003000/5
R5 = 17503500/5
X5 = 20004000/5
L6 = 18006000/6
X6 = 5002500
Y6 = 10004000
X7 = 16006400
Y8 = 24009600
Suffix
C
W
X
Y
S
Magnetic Trip Range

GMCP
Continuous
Ampere Rating
003 = 3
007 = 7
015 = 15
030 = 30
050 = 50
060 = 60
063 = 63
070 = 70
100 = 100
A0 =
C0 =
E0 =
H1 =
K2 =
J2 =
M2 =
1530
3570
75150
150300
250500
300600
320630
HMCPE
A0 =
C0 =
E0 =
H1 =
K2 =
M2 =
R3 =
T3 =
933
2177
45165
90330
150550
210770
3001100
5001500
Suffix
C = Non-aluminum
terminals
Table 27.4-99. 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum

Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes)
MCP Catalog Number
JG-Frame
250
5001000
6251250
7501500
HMCPJ250D5L
HMCPJ250F5L
HMCPJ250G5L
8751750
10002000
11252250
12502500
HMCPJ250J5L
HMCPJ250K5L
HMCPJ250L5L
HMCPJ250W5L
11252250
15003000
17503500
HMCPL600L6G
HMCPL600N6G
HMCPL600R6G
20004000
22504500
25005000
30006000
HMCPL600X6G
HMCPL600Y6G
HMCPL600P6G
HMCPL600M6G
LG-Frame
600
43

UL listed for use with Eaton motor starters.

Equipped with an electronic trip device.
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-39
Sheet 27 115
Motor Circuit Protector

Catalog Numbers and Ranges
Accessories
Tables are available to provide specific

catalog numbers and application
ranges for the G-Frame (GMCP),
E-Frame (HMCPE), J-Frame (HMCP)
and K-Frame (HMCP) motor circuit
protectors. Motor circuit protector
models are available with earth
leakage ground fault protection.
Models are also available for motor
starters provided with electronic
overload relays rather than thermal
overload relays, such as the Eatons
Advantage motor starter.
Similar tables for the selection of

the settings are available with motor
control products that use motor circuit
protectors. As required by the NEC,
the HMCP setting is selected by using
the actual full load ampere data from
the motor nameplate. The corresponding trip settings provided are within
13 times the minimum full load
amperes of the motor as required
by the NEC. The NEC allows a higher
setting for Design B energy efficient
motors.
Termination Accessories
Line and load terminals

Keeper nut/plug nut
Control wire terminal kit
Terminal shields
Terminal end covers
Interphase barriers
ELC current limiter
Multiwire connector
Only one internal accessory per

pole maximum
Alarm lockout (make/break)
Auxiliary switch/alarm lockout
Shunt tripstandard
Shunt triplow energy

Key interlock kit
Sliding bar interlockrequires
two breakers
Electrical (solenoid) operator
Handle mechanism
Door hardware/accessories
DIN rail adapter (GMCP only)
Modifications

Freeze test
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
See Volume 4Circuit Protection

Catalog, CA08100005E, (Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers, Tab 2) for detailed
tables.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 116
Motor Protector Circuit Breaker
22
Series G Motor Protector

Circuit Breaker (MPCB)
23
24
25
Product Selection
Table 27.4-100. JGMP Catalog Numbers
Continuous
Amperes
35 kAIC
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
50
100
160
250
JGMPS050G
JGMPS100G
JGMPS160G
JGMPS250G
JGMPH050G
JGMPH100G
JGMPH160G
JGMPH250G
Continuous
Amperes
50 kAIC
65 kAIC
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
250
400
600
630
LGMPS250G
LGMPS400G
LGMPS600G
LGMPS630G
LGMPH250G
LGMPH400G
LGMPH600G
LGMPH630G
Table 27.4-101. LGMP Catalog Numbers
26
27
28
Technical Data
Table 27.4-102. JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
Series G Motor Protector
Circuit Breaker (MPCB)
30
32
630A is not a UL listed rating. 600A is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
Note: For pre-trip alarm option, order style number 5721B31G02.
29
31
General Description
Eliminates need for separate
overload relay.
Maximum Rated Current (Amperes)
250
Breaker Type
JGMPS
JGMPH
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz

IEC 60947-2
Can be used with contactor
to eliminate need for overload
relay and still create manual
motor control
Meets requirement for motor
branch protection, including:
Disconnecting means
Branch circuit short-circuit
protection
Overload protection
220240 Vac
I cu
I cs
85
85
100
100
380415 Vac
I cu
I cs
40
40
70
70
660690 Vac
I cu
I cs
12
6
14
7
33
34
35
36
65 kAIC
NEMA UL 489
240 Vac
85
100
480 Vac
35
65
600 Vac
25
35
Number of poles
Ampere range
50250
50250
Table 27.4-103. LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range

Maximum Rated Current (Amperes)
630
Breaker Type
LGMPS
LGMPH
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 5060 Hz
37
Features
38
Phase unbalance protection

Phase loss protection
Hot trip/cold trip
High load alarm
Pre-detection trip relay option
Class 10, 15, 20, 30 protection
39
40
Standards and Certifications
IEC 60947-2
UL 489 rating
CSA C22.2
41
IEC 60947-2
NEMA UL 489
220240 Vac
I cu
I cs
85
85
100
100
380415 Vac
I cu
I cs
50
50
70
70
660690 Vac
I cu
I cs
20
10
25
13
240 Vac
85
100
480 Vac
50
65
600 Vac
25
35
Number of poles
Ampere range
250630
250630
630A is not a UL listed rating. 600A is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-41
Sheet 27 117
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module
Molded-Case Circuit
Breaker Power Monitoring
and Metering Module (PM3)
Features and Functions
Communications
The PM3 provides the following

metering, monitoring and
communications functions:
Metering
Power Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3)
Phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, Iavg)

Phase-to-phase voltages
(Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vavg)
Phase-to-neutral voltages
(Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vavg)
Real power (kW)total and
per phase
Reactive power (kVAR)total and
per phase
Apparent power (kVA)total and
per phase
Power factortotal and per phase
Real energy (WHr)forward,
reverse and net
Reactive Energy (VARHr)forward,
reverse and net
Apparent energy (VAHr)forward,
reverse and net
General Description
Accuracy
The Power Monitoring and Metering

Module (PM3) is a UL-listed add-on
communications module that
mounts directly to the load side
of three-pole molded-case circuit
breakers, similar to an earth leakage
module. The PM3 adds revenue
accurate power metering and breaker
status monitoring to new and/or
existing Series C and Series G
breakers. Regardless of the type of trip
unit (thermal-magnetic or electronic),
the PM3 can be applied in applications
where power metering, circuit breaker
monitoring and/or communications
is essential. The PM3 is extremely
flexible and can be used in main
breaker or feeder breaker applications.
The automatic voltage sensing
means that the same PM3 module
can be used on 208, 240 or 480 Vac
applications. It can also be installed
in reverse-feed and reverse-phasing
(CBA) applications.
Voltage and amperage: 0.5% of

reading
Watts, VARs, VA: 1% of reading
Energy: 1% per ANSI C12.1
Revenue Grade Accuracy: ANSI C12.1
Monitoring
Breaker status
Open/close statusthru breaker
auxiliary contact
Tripped statusthru breaker bell
alarm contact
Unit healthflashing status LED
when module is powered
Breaker must include auxiliary contact

and bell alarm contact accessory.
INCOM and Modbus RTU

communications
Shielded-twisted pair
communications
Daisy-chaining of multiple units
Web-based communications
available through a Power
Xpert Gateway
TX and RX communication
diagnostic LEDs
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Metering Module
Control Power
The PM3 is powered directly from the
circuit breaker voltage for applications
480 Vac and below. External control
power is not required for these
applications. However, an auxiliary
24 Vdc external power input is
included for applications requiring
communications capability even when
the breaker circuit is de-energized.
Note: For 600V applications, external 24 Vdc
auxiliary power is required.
30
31
32
33
34
Product Selection
Table 27.4-104. PM3 Product Selection
PM3 Modules
Frame
480V
600V
PM3FM
PM3JM
PM3LM
PM3FI480
PM3JI480
PM3LI480
PM3FI600
PM3JI600
PM3LI600
Modbus
FD
JG
KD and LG
35
Catalog Number
36
37
INCOM
FD
JG
KD and LG
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

Eaton Advanced Meters
December 2013
Sheet 27 118
22

Metered parameters
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Ia, Ib, Ic
Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn
Apparent Energy, Forward Real
Energy, Reverse Real Energy, Net
Real Energy, Lagging Reactive
Energy, Leading Reactive Energy,
Net Reactive Energy
Apparent Power A, B, C; Apparent
Power Total; Reactive Power A, B, C;
Reactive Power Total; Real Power A,
B, C; Real Power Total
Frequency, Apparent Power Factor,
Apparent PFA, Apparent PFB,
Apparent PFC
Table 27.4-105. PM3 Power Monitoring and Communications Module Technical Specifications
for Modbus RTU
Description
Specification
Current Inputs
Pickup current
0.3A rms
Maximum reported current
FD/JG 250A rms

KD/LD 630A rms
Accuracy 0.5%
0.5% of reading
Voltage Inputs
Range
Line-to-neutral 30366 Vac

Line-to-line 52635 Vac
Supported systems
Three-element wye, three-element wye + neutral

Two-element delta, four-wire delta systems
Input impedance
996 kiloohm/phase
Burden per phase
0.36 VA/phase max. at 600V;

0.014 VA at 120V
Phase voltage connections
Internal via screw terminal to busbar. For wye system, a neutral is

required to be connected to the PM3 on the right Phoenix connector.
Neutral connection
If neutral is not available, the meter will calculate a virtual neutral

based on the phase-to-phase rms voltage. The system voltage must
be balanced for this to be accurate.
Frequency
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Accuracy
0.1 Hz
Resolution
0.1 Hz
Power and Energy

Accuracy
1% of reading (ANSI C12.1)
Isolation
32
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V.
Environmental Ratings
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Operating temperature
20C to +50C
Storage temperature
20C to +50C
Operating humidity
5 to 95% RH noncondensing
Sensing Method
Voltage, current
True rms
Sampling rate
13.02K samples per second
Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA
1.03 sec at 60 Hz
All other parameters
1.07 sec at 60 Hz
Power Supply (External)

DC voltage
1830 Vdc
Maximum current
30 mA at 24 Vdc
Burden
0.72W
Standard Communication Format

Connection type
Three-wire RS-485 (A, B, Common)
Com port baud rate
9600 or 19,200 bauds
Modbus address range
01247
Data format
Selectable (8, N, 1 | 8, N, 2 | 8,
Even, 1 | 8, Odd, 1)
Protocols
Modbus RTU
Internal termination resistor

selectable ON or OFF
Via DIP switch
Default: 19,200 bauds

Default: 8, N, 2
Default: Enabled
42
43
CA08104001E

Eaton Advanced Meters
December 2013
27.4-43
Sheet 27 119

Dimensions and Weights
22
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.38
(35.1)
2.88
(73.2)
0.69
(17.5)
3.50 (88.9)
3.39
(86.1)
3.19
(81.0)
Line End
3.63
(92.2)
3.63
(92.2)
On
Off
6.00
(152.4)
CL
Handle
4.50
(114.3)
1.72
(43.7)
0.86
(21.8)
24
25
5.77
(146.6)
4.92
(125.0)
5.77
(146.6)
On/I
CL
Handle
CL
Handle
S
RY EA
LED
FACTO
O
N
Line End
23
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
(103.1)
3.81
(96.8)
Off/O
8.44
(214.4)
CL
Handle
10.13
(257.3)
26
27
1 2 3 4 5 6
11.00
(279.4)
9.53
(242.1)
12.14
(308.4)
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module
Tx
ON O
Rx
13.83
(351.3)
Network Address
Bell Alarm
COM
COM
Aux. Alarm
V Neutral
See breaker for terminal information.
See instruction sheet for high voltage tests.
For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame
Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.
MODBUS
COM
24 Vdc (+)
Power
24 Vdc ()
28
STATUS
Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5 6
N1
EARTH
123456789101112131415
2.06
(52.3)
3.34
(84.8)
Load End
2.74
(69.6)
5.48 (139.2)
3.42
(86.9)
3.94 (100.1)
4.13 (104.9)
Figure 27.4-9. FD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
1.38
(35.1)
0.69
(17.5)
Load End
29
3.98
(101.1)
4.06
(103.1)
4.88 (124.0)
30
31
Figure 27.4-11. KD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus

3.57 (90.7)
3.44
(87.4)
3.34
(84.8)
Line End
1.72
(43.7)
0.86
(21.8)
Line End
32
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
(103.1)
3.98
(101.1)
33
123456789101112131415
3.95
(100.3)
3.17
(80.5)
PUSH TO
TRIP
S
RY EA
LED
FACTO
10.50
(266.7)
O
N
1 2 3 4 5 6
5.58
(141.7)
4.73
(120.1)
CL
Handle
CL
Handle
O
F
F
5.50
(139.7)
3.95
(100.3)
7.00
(177.8)
O
N
12.00
(304.8)
CL
Handle
8.44
(214.4)
12.14
(308.4)
5.58
(141.7)
CL
Handle
10.13
(257.3)
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module
Tx
ON O
Rx
Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5 6
STATUS
Network Address
N1
A
B
MODBUS
COM
EARTH
24 Vdc (+)
24 Vdc ()
Power
Bell Alarm
COM
COM
Aux. Alarm
V Neutral
See breaker for terminal information.
See instruction sheet for high voltage tests.
For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame
Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.
34
35
36
13.82
(351.0)
37
123456789101112131415
2.06
(52.3)
3.34
(84.8)
Load End
4.13 (104.9)
3.42
(86.9)
4.41 (112.0)
Figure 27.4-10. JG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
2.74
(69.6)
5.48 (139.2)
Load End
3.98
(101.1)
4.06
(103.1)
5.43 (137.9)
Figure 27.4-12. LG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
38
39
40
Table 27.4-106. PM3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights

Description
Weight in lbs (kg)
Basic unit in inches (mm)
Shipping container dimensions in inches (mm)
CA08104001E
Frame
Dimensions and Weights
FD
1.26 (0.57)
JG
1.60 (0.73)
KD/LG
2.25 (1.02)
FD
4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
JG
4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
KD/LG
5.48 W x 3.70 L x 4.06 H (139.2 x 94.0 x 103.2)
FD/JG
8.00 x 5.13 x 5.50 (203.2 x 130.3 x 139.7)
KD/LG
6.25 x 8.25 x 7.00 (158.7 x 209.5 x 177.8)
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 120
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
22
30 mA Ground Fault
(Earth Leakage) Modules
23
24
Table 27.4-108. EG-Frame Earth Leakage

Modules, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted,
230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
125
125
3
4
ELEBE3125G
ELEBE4125G
400
400
3
4
ELLBN3400W
ELLBN4400W
600
600
3
4
ELLBN3600W
ELLBN4600W
Table 27.4-109. JG-Frame Ground Fault

Modules, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted,
120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
25
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
150
150
3
4
ELJBN3150W
ELJBN4150W
250
250
3
4
ELJBN3250W
ELJBN4250W
26
27
28
Clockwise from Left: JG, LG
MCCBs Shown with Ground
Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
General Description
Eaton offers a three- and four-pole
30 mA ground fault (earth leakage)
protection module for JG and LG
breakers. The module does not restrict
the use of other breaker accessories.
UL-listed modules are available for
JG and LG MCCBs. The JG and LG
modules are both bottom mounted
for circuits up to 160 and 250A (JG),
or 400 and 630A for the LG.
The module is completely self-contained
because the current sensor, relay and
power supply are located inside the
product. Current pickup settings are
selectable from 0.03 to 10A for all
IEC-rated modules and JG UL-listed
module, and 0.0330A for the LG
UL-listed modules. Time delays are
also selectable from instantaneous
to 1.0 second for 0.10A settings and
above. A current pickup setting of
0.03A defaults to an instantaneous
time setting regardless of the time
dials position. Two alarm contacts
come as standard: a 50% pretrip and
a 100% after trip, both based only on
earth leakage current levels.
40
Product Selection
41
Table 27.4-107. EG-Frame Ground Fault

120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
125
125
3
4
ELEBN3125G
ELEBN4125G
42
Table 27.4-111. LG-Frame Ground Fault

120480 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Table 27.4-110. JG-Frame Earth Leakage

Modules, IEC (Bottom Mounted,
230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
160
160
3
4
ELJBE3160W
ELJBE4160W
250
250
3
4
ELJBE3250W
ELJBE4250W
Table 27.4-112. LG-Frame Earth Leakage

Modules, IEC (Bottom Mounted,
230415 Vac, 50/60 Hz)
Amperes
Poles
Catalog
Number
400
400
3
4
ELLBE3400W
ELLBE4400W
630
630
3
4
ELLBE3630W
ELLBE4630W
Table 27.4-113. Dimensions for Assembled

Breaker and Earth Leakage Module
Frame Height
Width
Depth
Three-Pole
EG
JG
LG
10.25 (260.3) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8)

11.25 (285.8) 4.13 (104.9) 3.57 (90.7)
15.38 (390.7) 5.48 (139.2) 4.06 (103.1)
Four-Pole
EG
JG
LG
10.25 (260.3) 4.00 (101.6) 2.98 (75.8)

11.25 (285.8) 5.50 (139.7) 3.57 (90.7)
15.38 (390.7) 7.23 (183.6) 4.06 (103.1)
Figure 27.4-13. UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
43
Figure 27.4-14. IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-45
Sheet 27 121
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules
Current Limiting Circuit

Breaker Modules
These breakers are most commonly
applied when very high fault levels
are available and with applications
where the current limiting capability
is used upstream of the final load
to limit current to the load. Typical
loads include lighting and power
distribution, and motor controller
applications.
Features and Benefits

The combination of the Series G
E-Frame current limiting breaker
or HMCP and the current limiter
module provides the following
system protection:
Overloads, by using inverse time

current tripping characteristics of
the molded-case circuit breaker
General Overview
Product Selection
Power demand continues to grow in

new and existing facilities. To meet
increased demand, larger utility
supplies, spot networks and large
facility transformers are installed.
The increased capacity of the electrical
source provides increased fault
currents. In the past, 65 and 100 kA
overcurrent protective devices may
have suited the job. The new systems
require in excess of 100 kA shortcircuit protection. Eaton manufactures
non-fused current limiting modules
150 kA at 480 Vac. Unlike fused
current limiters with a one-time use,
the current limiter module provides
automatic reset of the module after
interruption. Reset the molded-case
circuit breaker to restore power to the
system without worry of finding the
correct replacement fuse.
Table 27.4-114. EG
General Description
Table 27.4-115. HMCP
The current limiting breaker modules

use a reverse loop stationary contact
arm. When high short-circuit current is
flowing through the contacts of these
modules, the positions of the reverse
loop and moving contact arm induce
opposing magnetic fields. The resulting flux lines cause rapid contact blowapart under fault conditions, resulting
in very high interrupting capacities
and providing current limiting
characteristics. Current limiting
breaker modules, in combination
with Series G E-Frame breakers,
are available from 15 to 100A and
have an interrupting rating up to
100 kA at 600 Vac.
CA08104001E
Low-level short circuits, by using

delay tripping characteristics of the
molded-case circuit breaker
High-level short circuits, by using
ultra-high-speed, blow-apart
contacts of the current limiting
module in series with the circuit
breaker contacts. The high-level
current limiting action is achieved
by the use of special design, blowapart contacts. The opening speed
of the contacts is amplified by the
repulsion force in the slot motor and
reverse loop stationary contact arm
to effectively separate the contacts
under high-level fault conditions
in less than one millisecond. The
rapid rise of arc voltage introduces
impedance into the system, thus
limiting the amount of the otherwise
available fault current
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
UL Listed
(NEMA/IEC Rated)
Base Molded-Case
Circuit Breaker
Breaker with
Line Side
Mounted
Current Limiter
Breaker with
Load Side
Mounted
Current Limiter
Line and Load

Terminations
Included
Interphase
Barrier Included
for Limiter
EGC3015FFG
EGC3016FFG
EGC3020FFG
EGC3015FFGQ01
EGC3016FFGQ01
EGC3020FFGQ01
EGC3015FFGQ02
EGC3016FFGQ02
EGC3020FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
32
EGC3025FFG
EGC3030FFG
EGC3032FFG
EGC3025FFGQ01
EGC3030FFGQ01
EGC3032FFGQ01
EGC3025FFGQ02
EGC3030FFGQ02
EGC3032FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
33
EGC3035FFG
EGC3040FFG
EGC3045FFG
EGC3035FFGQ01
EGC3040FFGQ01
EGC3045FFGQ01
EGC3035FFGQ02
EGC3040FFGQ02
EGC3045FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
34
EGC3050FFG
EGC3060FFG
EGC3063FFG
EGC3050FFGQ01
EGC3060FFGQ01
EGC3063FFGQ01
EGC3050FFGQ02
EGC3060FFGQ02
EGC3063FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
35
EGC3070FFG
EGC3080FFG
EGC3090FFG
EGC3100FFG
EGC3070FFGQ01
EGC3080FFGQ01
EGC3090FFGQ01
EGC3100FFGQ01
EGC3070FFGQ02
EGC3080FFGQ02
EGC3090FFGQ02
EGC3100FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
36
Two interphase barriers required on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase
barriers required on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker (2) load end of limiter.
Motor
Circuit
Protector
Breaker with
Line Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Breaker with
Load Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Line and Load

Terminations
Included
Interphase
Barrier Included
for Limiter
HMCPE003A0C
HMCPE007C0C
HMCPE015E0C
HMCPE003A0CQ01
HMCPE007C0CQ01
HMCPE015E0CQ01
HMCPE003A0CQ02
HMCPE007C0CQ02
HMCPE015E0CQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
HMCPE030H1C
HMCPE050K2C
HMCPE070M2C
HMCPE030H1CQ01
HMCPE050K2CQ01
HMCPE070M2CQ01
HMCPE030H1CQ02
HMCPE050K2CQ02
HMCPE070M2CQ02
T125EF
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
HMCPE100R3C
HMCPE100T3C
HMCPE100R3CQ01
HMCPE100T3CQ01
HMCPE100R3CQ02
HMCPE100T3CQ02
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK
Two interphase barriers required on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase
barriers required on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker (2) load end of limiter.
31
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 122
22
23
DimensionsApproximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Table 27.4-116. Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module
Frame
Height
Width
Depth
EG
HMCP
9.66 (245.7)
9.66 (245.7)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
2.98 (75.8)
2.98 (75.8)
24
25
0.56
(14.2)
26
9.66
(245.4)
4.17
(105.9)
3.61
(91.7)
27
28
29
1.00
(25.4)
3.00
(76.2)
0.50
1.00 (12.7)
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
30
3.20
(81.3)
4.17
(105.9)
31
32
33
2.75 0.09
(69.9) (2.3)
34
35
0.78
(19.8)
0.41
(10.4)
36
Figure 27.4-15. EG-Frame with Current Limiter Module
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-47
Sheet 27 123
Selection DataCurrent Limiting Breakers
Current Limiting
Non-Fused Type
FCL-Frame 15100A,
LCL-Frame 125400A
FCL-Frame
LCL-Frame
Terminals
22
Breakers listed include line and load

terminals. Terminals are Underwriters
Laboratories listed for wire sizes and
types listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint compound.
To order optional aluminum terminals,
add suffix Z to breaker catalog
number listed.
23
24
25
Table 27.4-118. FCL Terminals

Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
26
Standard Pressure Terminals

100
Al/Cu
#141/0
27
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

50
100
Al/Cu
Al/Cu
#14#4
#44/0
28
LCL-Frame Breaker

Frame
FCL
FCL-Frame Breaker

Table 27.4-117. FCL Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
Volts AC
Trip
(50/60 Hz) Type
(Symmetrical Amperes)
240
480
200,000
150,000
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
Number Width
of Poles
2, 3
LCL, LCLG 2, 3
Height Depth
4.13
8.75
3.50
(104.8) (222.3) (88.9)
8.25
16.00 4.00
(209.6) (406.4) (101.6)
Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.
Table 27.4-120. Thermal-Magnetic

Trip Ratings
Frame
Ratings
FCL
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,

60, 70, 80, 90, 100
Note: On all three-phase delta, grounded B

phase applications, refer to Eaton.
Table 27.4-121. SELTRONIC Electronic Trip

Unit Rating Plug
Frame
Ratings
LCL, LCLG 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250,

275, 300, 350, 400
Breaker with built-in ground fault protection.
Listed with Underwriters Laboratories

Except as Noted
Type LCL breakers are not defined in
Federal Specifications W-C-375-b.
29
30

Table 27.4-122. LCL Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
31
Volts AC
Trip
(50/60 Hz) Type
(Symmetrical Amperes)
240
480
600
200,000
200,000
100,000
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
32
33

34
Terminals
Two terminals are required per pole.
Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories
listed for wire type and range listed
below. When used with aluminum
cable, use joint compound.
35
Table 27.4-123. LCL Terminals
37
Maximum AWG/kcmil
Breaker
Wire Range/Number
Amperes of Conductors
Terminal
Catalog
Number
Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

225
400
(1) #6350 kcmil Cu

(1) #4250 kcmil Cu,
plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Cu
T225LA
T401LA
36
38
39
40

225
(1) #6350 kcmil Cu, or

(1) #4350 kcmil Al
TA225LA1
400
(1) #4250 kcmil Al/Cu,

plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Al/Cu
TA400LA1
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 124
22
23
Current LimitingFused Type

FB TRIPAC 15100A,
LA TRI-PAC 70400A
FB TRI-PAC
24
25
LA TRI-PAC
Terminals
Breakers listed include line and load
terminals. Terminals are Underwriters
Laboratories listed for wire sizes and
types listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint compound.
To order optional aluminum terminals,
add suffix Z to breaker catalog
number listed.
Table 27.4-124. FB TRI-PAC Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
26
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range
Standard Pressure Terminals

100
27
Al/Cu
(1) #141/0

50
100
28
Al/Cu
Al/Cu
(1) #14#4
(1) #44/0
LA TRI-PAC Breaker
29
30
31
32
33
FB TRI-PAC Breaker

Except as Noted
FB TRI-PAC breakers meet the
requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a
and 26a circuit breakers as defined
in Federal Specification W-C-375b.

Underwriters Laboratories Listed
34
35
36
Frame Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth

Except as Noted
FB
2, 3
4.13
(104.8)
8.75
(222.3)
3.50
(88.9)
LA
2, 3
8.13
(206.4)
16.00
(406.4)
7.75
(196.9)
LA TRI-PAC breakers meet the

requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a
and 26a circuit breakers as defined
in Federal Specification W-C-375b.

Table 27.4-126. Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Ratings
Frame
Ratings
FB TRI-PAC
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100
LA TRI-PAC
70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200,

225, 250, 300, 350, 400

600 Vac maximum: 200,000A
symmetrical.
Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Vdc maximum: 100,000A.

symmetrical.

B phase applications, refer to Eaton.
Terminals

listed for wire size and type listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors,
use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add suffix Z to
complete breaker catalog number.

37
Table 27.4-127. LA TRI-PAC Terminals
38
Maximum AWG/kcmil
Breaker
Wire Range/Number
Amperes of Conductors
39
Terminal
Catalog
Number
40
41
225
225
(1) #6350 kcmil Cu

(1) #6250 kcmil Cu
T225LA
T225LBF
400
(1) #4250 kcmil Cu,

plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Cu
T401LA
42
43
225
(1) #6350 kcmil Cu, or

(1) #4350 kcmil Al/Cu
TA225LA1
400
(1) #4250 kcmil Al/Cu,

plus
(1) 3/0600 kcmil Al/Cu
TA400LA1
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-49
Sheet 27 125
Current LimitingFused Type

NB TRI-PAC 300800A,
PB TRI-PAC 6001600A
NB TRI-PAC
PB TRI-PAC
Terminals
listed for wire size and type listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors,
use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add suffix Z to
complete breaker catalog number.
23
24
Table 27.4-128. NB TRI-PAC Terminals

Maximum AWG/kcmil
Ampere
Wire Range/Number
Rating
of Conductors
25
Terminal
Catalog
Number
26

350
700
800
1 #1600 kcmil Cu
2 2/0500 kcmil Cu
3 3/0500 kcmil Cu
22
T350NB
T700NB1
T1000NB1
27

700
800
800
2 #1500 kcmil Al/Cu

3 3/0400 kcmil Al/Cu
3 500750 kcmil Al/Cu
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1201NB1
NB TRI-PAC Breaker

Except as Noted
NB TRI-PAC breakers meet the
requirements for Class 16b, 17a and
26a circuit breakers as defined in
Federal Specification W-C-375b.
Frame Number Width

of Poles
Height
Depth
NB
2, 3
8.25
(209.6)
22.00
(558.8)
5.50
(139.7)
PB
2, 3
12.06
(306.4)
22.13
(562.0)
9.06
(230.2)
Table 27.4-130. Thermal-Magnetic Trip

Ratings
Frame
Ratings
NB TRI-PAC
300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800
PB TRI-PAC
600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200,

1400, 1600
28
PB TRI-PAC Breaker

Except as Noted
PB TRI-PAC breakers meet the
requirements for Class 17a and 26a
circuit breakers as defined in Federal
Specification W-C-375b.

symmetrical.

symmetrical.
31
32
33

Bus Bar Connectors
T Connector for Cu/Al Bus
Two required per pole. For rear bus

connection. Accepts up to four bus
bolts. May be rotated 90.

30

B phase applications, refer to Eaton.
29
34
35
36
37
38
T Connector for Cu/Al Bus
Cable Connector (Optional)

For T Connector. Accepts four
600 kcmil copper cables.
39
40
41
42
Optional Cable Connector
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 126
Selection DataCircuit Breaker Enclosures
22
23
NEMA 1 General Purpose
NEMA 4/4X, 5 Water and Dustproof
Surface or Flush Mounting

151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
Stainless SteelType 304,

Surface Mounting
151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
24
UL File Number E7819

CSA File Number LR84319
25
NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location

Cast Aluminum, Explosion-Proof
Surface Mounting
151200A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc
26
NEMA 1
27
28
29
30
31
Eatons NEMA 1 enclosed breakers are

designed for indoor use in commercial
buildings, apartment buildings and
other areas where a general purpose
enclosure is applicable. The breaker
is front operable and is capable of
being padlocked in the OFF position.
(Padlocking not available on enclosures
for QUICKLAG breakers.) Ratings
through 1200A are listed with
Underwriters Laboratories as suitable
for service entrance application. Both
surface and flush mounted enclosures
are available.
32

33
NEMA 3R Rainproof
Surface Mounting
34
Interchangeable Hubs (through 400A)

151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
NEMA 4/4X, 5
This enclosure meets NEMA 4/4X and

5 requirements for water and dustproof
applications and has no knockouts or
other openings. It is particularly well
suited for use in dairies, borax mines,
breweries, paper mills and other process
industries. The operating handle can
be padlocked in the OFF position, and
is interlocked to prevent the door from
opening when the breaker is ON. Ratings
through 1200A are Underwriters
Laboratories listed as suitable for
service entrance application.
NEMA 12 Dustproof
Surface Mounting
No Knockouts or Other Openings
151200A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
35
40
41
42
43
Hazardous location, Class I, Groups B,

C, D, Divisions 1, 2; Class II, Groups E,
F, G, Divisions 1, 2. This special service
cast aluminum enclosure is supplied
with a wide, machined flanged cover to
prevent igniting outside atmospheres
by arcing from inside the enclosure.
Front operable, the handle padlocks
in the OFF position. Enclosures rated
600A and above have lift-off hinges for
ease of assembly.
Note: XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.
Seismic Qualification
37
39
NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location
UL File Number E84577 Enclosed

Circuit Breakers
36
38
Ratings through 1200A are listed by

Underwriters Laboratories as suitable
for service entrance application.
A NEMA 12 semi-dust-tight design
that includes knockouts is available.
These units are rated 15400A, 600 Vac,
500 Vdc.
NEMA 3R
This general purpose outdoor service

center employs a circuit breaker inside
a weatherproof sheet steel enclosure
to serve as a main disconnect and
protective device for feeder circuits.
The operating handle can be padlocked
in the OFF position, and is interlocked
to prevent the door from opening when
the breaker is ON. Ratings through
1200A are listed by Underwriters
Laboratories as suitable for service
entrance application.
NEMA 12 Dustproof
Refer to Tab 1 for information on

seismic qualification for this and
other Eaton products.
The Eaton Type 12 enclosure is

designed in line with specifications
for special industry application where
unusually severe conditions involving
oil, coolant, dust and other foreign
materials exist in the operating
atmosphere. The handle padlocks
in the OFF position and the cover is
interlocked with the handle mechanism
to prevent opening the cover with the
circuit breaker in the ON position.
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-51
Sheet 27 127

To determine enclosed circuit breaker dimensions, first
select the desired frame size along with the desired NEMA
class of enclosure (from Table 27.4-131). This will determine
the enclosure catalog number.
Then, use Tables 27.4-135 through 27.4-141 to determine
appropriate dimensions for that selected catalog number.
Table 27.4-131. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide
Breaker
Frame
Breaker
Ampere
Range
15100
EHD, FD, FDB,

HFD, FDC
15100
EDB, EDS, ED, EDH, EDC,

EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
(F Frame)
EHD, FD, FDB
HFD, FDC
FD, FDB, HFD, FDC,
ED, EDH, EDC
JDB, JD, HJD, JDC
JD, JDB, HJD, JDC
KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK
15225
1550
60225
125225
100250
125250
125400
LD, LDB, HLD
300600
LD, LDB, HLD,

MDL, HMDL
MDL, HMDL, ND,
HND
300600
400800
4001200
Breaker
Frame
Breaker
Ampere
Range
NEMA
Class
Catalog
Number
1 surface
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
1 surface
1 flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
1 surface
1 flush
3R
SGDN100
RGDN100
JGDN100
DGDN100
WGDN100
SFDN100
FFDN100
RFDN100
JFDN100
DFDN100
WFDN100
SEF3
FEF3
REF3
7/9 cast alum.

7/9 cast alum.
1 surface
1 flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
1 surface
1 flush
3R
XFDN050B
XFDN225B
SFDN225
FFDN225
RFDN225
JFDN225
DFDN225
WFDN225
SJJ3
FJJ3
RJJ3
1 surface
1 flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
7/9 cast alum.
1 surface
1 flush
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
7/9 cast alum.
1 surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
7/9 cast alum.
SJDN250
FJDN250
RJDN250
JJDN250
DJDN250
WJDN250
XJDN250B
SKDN400
FKDN400
RKDN400
JKDN400
DKDN400
WKDN400
XKDN400B
SLDN600
RLDN600
JLDN600
WLDN600
XMCN800B
22
Enclosure
NEMA
Class
Catalog
Number
23
24
Series G Breakers
EGB, EGE, EGS,
EGH, EGC
15225
1 surface
1 flush
3R
3R
SEF3
FEF3
REF3
REG4
JGE, JGS, JGH,

JGC, JGU
100250
1 surface
1 flush
3R
3R
SJJ3
FJJ3
RJJ3
RJG4
LGE, LGS, LGH
250600
1 surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SLG630
RLG630
JLG630
WLG630
1 surface
3R
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
SLG630E
RLG630E
JLG630E
WLG630E
Enclosure
Series C Breakers
GC, GHC, GD
two- and three-pole only
GHCGFEP
single-pole only
Table 27.4-131. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers

Selection Guide (Continued)
25
26
27
Earth Leakage Breakers

LGE, LGS, LGH used
with ELLBN
250600
TRI-PAC Breakers
FB-P
15100
3R
12
12K
4/4X, 5 st. steel
RFDN150
JFDN150
DFDN150
WFDN150
LA-P
70400
1 surface
3R
12
4/4X
SNDN1200
RNDN1200
JNDN1200
WNDN1200
12
4/4X, 5 st. steel
JNDPN800
WNDPN800
NB-P

500800
Three- or four-pole.
65 kAIC at 480 Vac maximum.
Four-pole only.
Requires additional adapter plate.
1 surface
SNDN1200
3R
RNDN1200
12
JNDN1200
4/4X, 5 st. steel
WNDN1200
ND, HND
4001200
7/9 cast alum.
XNDN1200B
Suitable for use with single-pole breaker base mounting plate kit.
QCCBP required.
Maximum wire size: 4/0.
Three-pole only.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 128
22
Table 27.4-132. Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable

Maximum
Enclosure
Rating (Amperes)
23
24
Main Lug Size

Cu/Al
Ground Lug Size Catalog

Cu/Al
Number
100
(1) 141/0
(1) 142
DH100NK
100 (all others)
(1) 141/0
(1) 141/0
INK100
INK250
250
400
25
600
26
1200
27
28
(1) 4350 kcmil
(1) 4300 kcmil
(1) 4350 kcmil
(1) 4300 kcmil
INK250G
(1) 4750 kcmil or

(2) 1/0250 kcmil
(1) 4300 kcmil
INK400
(2) 250500 kcmil
(1) 4300 kcmil
(3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or (1) #6250 kcmil

(4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil
31
32
Description
Compliance
Conduit
Opening
Catalog
Number
A universal breather/drain
fitting is installed in the top
of an enclosure to provide
ventilation to minimize
condensation and in the
bottom to allow drainage
of accumulated condensation while maintaining
explosion-proof integrity.
Type BD:
NEMA 7Class I,
Groups C, D;
Class I, Zone 1,
Group IIB
NEMA 9Class II,
Groups F, G
0.50 (12.7)
XPBD2
INK1200
For use with RFDN100, SFDN100, SEF3, FEF3, REF3 and REG4
enclosures with breakers 100A and less.
For use with SJJ3, FJJ3, RJJ3 and RJG4 enclosures only.
Type DBB:
0.50 (12.7)
NEMA 7Class I,
Groups B,
C, D; Class I, Zone 1,
Group IIB
+ Hydrogen
NEMA 9Class II,
Groups E, F, G
XPDBB50
Table 27.4-133. Raintight HubsDimensions in Inches (mm)

Hub Diameter
Catalog
Number
Small Hubs
29
30
INK600
Table 27.4-134. Breather and Drain, Hazardous Enclosures

Dimensions in Inches (mm)
For use with

RGDN and RFDN
All rainproof enclosures
30400A are shipped with
plate over cutout. Hubs are
not supplied with screws
on 30400A enclosures.
Use screws from plate.
1.00 (25.4)
1.25 (31.8)
1.50 (38.1)
2.00 (50.8)
DS100H1
DS125H1
DS150H1
DS200H1
Large Hubs
For use with
RJDN. RKDN
has two cutouts
2.00 (50.8) DS200H2

2.50 (63.5) DS250H2
3.00 (76.2) DS300H2
Required if using Type DS hubs

on RJDN and RKDN enclosures DS900AK
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-53
Sheet 27 129
Technical Data and SpecificationsCircuit Breaker Enclosures
22
NEMA 1, 12, 12K, 3R
23
Note: Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Table 27.4-135. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted (See Figure 27.4-16)

Catalog
Number
Maximum Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Amperes A
B
SGDN100
SFDN100
SEF3
SFDN225
SJJ3
SJDN250
100
100
225
225
250
250
SKDN400
SLG630
SLG630E
SLDN600
SNDN1200

400
600
600
600
1200
17.50 (444.5)
19.13 (485.9)
23.45 (595.6)
23.25 (590.6)
34.69 (881.1)
34.70 (881.4)
8.56 (217.4)
9.13 (231.9)
8.38 (212.9)
8.56 (217.4)
10.90 (276.9)
10.92 (277.4)
38.81 (985.8)
51.06 (1296.9)
51.06 (1296.9)
45.88 (1165.4)
61.22 (1555.0)
11.06 (280.9)
21.87 (555.5)
21.87 (555.5)
14.31 (363.5)
21.44 (544.6)
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
6.28 (159.5)
5.20 (132.1)
6.51 (165.4)
6.28 (159.5)
7.49 (190.2)
7.20 (182.9)
13.03 (331.0)
17.00 (431.8)
18.88 (479.6)
18.75 (476.3)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
1.20 (30.5)
N/A
1.13 (28.7)
1.20 (30.5)
1.95 (49.5)
1.88 (47.8)
17.19 (436.6)
18.81 (477.8)
23.00 (584.2)
22.94 (582.7)
34.22 (869.2)
34.39 (873.5)
12 (5)
13 (6)
15 (7)
15 (7)
27 (12)
31 (14)
10.94 (277.9)
9.96 (253.0)
9.96 (253.0)
12.38 (314.5)
15.41 (391.4)
34.00 (863.6)
51.63 (1311.5)
51.63 (1311.5)
46.56 (1182.6)
61.84 (1570.7)
9.28 (235.7)
1.94 (49.3)
1.94 (49.3)
1.91 (48.5)
1.97 (50.0)
38.50 (977.9)
50.13 (1273.3)
50.13 (1273.3)
45.56 (1157.2)
60.91 (1547.1)
53 (24)
90 (41)
90 (41)
81 (37)
178 (81)

Total width, including door clip is 9.95 inches (252.7 mm).
Single centered mounting hole provided.
Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil.
For earth leakage applications. Includes an opening so that the settings are accessible without removing the cover.
Maximum Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Amperes
A
B
FFDN100
FEF3
FFDN225
FJJ3
FJDN250
FKDN400
100
225
225
250
250
400

18.81 (477.8)
24.50 (622.3)
24.56 (623.8)
36.00 (914.4)
36.02 (914.9)
40.13 (1019.3)
9.72 (246.9)
9.75 (247.7)
9.72 (246.9)
12.25 (311.2)
12.23 (310.6)
12.38 (314.5)
25
26
27
28
29
30
Table 27.4-136. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted (See Figure 27.4-17)

Catalog
Number
24
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
6.28 (159.5)
6.51 (165.4)
6.28 (159.5)
7.49 (190.2)
7.20 (182.9)
10.94 (277.9)
13.03 (331.0)
18.88 (479.6)
18.75 (476.3)
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
34.00 (863.6)
1.86 (47.2)
1.82 (46.2)
1.86 (47.2)
2.63 (66.8)
1.88 (47.8)
2.94 (74.7)
18.50 (469.9)
23.00 (584.2)
24.25 (616.0)
34.22 (869.2)
35.70 (906.8)
39.81 (1011.2)
12 (5)
15 (7)
15 (7)
27 (12)
32 (15)
53 (24)

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Figure 27.4-16. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted
Figure 27.4-17. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted
40
41
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
Sheet 27 130
22
23
Table 27.4-137. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof (See Figure 27.4-18)

Catalog
Number
Maximum
Amperes

A
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
JGDN100
JFDN100
JFDN225
100
100
225
19.91 (505.7)
19.91 (505.7)
25.66 (651.8)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
18.53 (470.7)
18.53 (470.7)
24.28 (616.7)
1.70 (43.2)
1.70 (43.2)
1.70 (43.2)
16 (7)
19 (9)
19 (9)
JJDN250
JKDN400
JLG630
250
400
600
37.53 (953.3)
41.69 (1058.9)
53.37 (1355.6)
11.88 (301.8)
12.31 (312.7)
23.06 (585.7)
10.22 (259.6)
14.06 (357.1)
14.10 (358.1)
35.77 (908.6)
39.94 (1014.5)
51.63 (1311.4)
1.94 (49.3)
1.97 (50.0)
1.94 (49.3)
37 (17)
58 (26)
94 (43)
25
JLG630E
JLDN600
JNDPN800
600
600
800
53.37 (1355.6)
48.31 (1227.1)
63.59 (1615.2)
23.06 (585.7)
15.56 (395.2)
22.63 (574.8)
14.10 (358.1)
15.50 (393.7)
17.63 (447.8)
51.63 (1311.4)
46.56 (1182.6)
1.94 (49.3)
1.92 (48.8)
94 (43)
84 (38)
110 (50)
26
JNDN1200
DGDN100
DFDN100
1200
100
100
63.59 (1615.2)
19.91 (505.7)
19.91 (505.7)
22.63 (574.8)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
17.63 (447.8)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
61.84 (1570.7)
1.97 (50.0)
175 (80)
16 (7)
19 (9)
27
DFDN100E
DFDN225
DJDN250
DKDN400
25.66 (651.8)
25.66 (651.8)
37.53 (953.3)
41.69 (1058.9)
9.16 (232.7)
9.16 (232.7)
11.88 (301.8)
12.31 (312.7)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
10.22 (259.6)
14.06 (357.1)
24
28

29
100
225
250
400
19 (9)
19 (9)
37 (17)
58 (26)

For earth leakage applications.
Table 27.4-138. NEMA 3R Rainproof (See Figure 27.4-19)
30
Catalog
Number
31
RGDN100
RFDN100
REF3
REG4
RFDN225
RJJ3
RJG4
RJDN250
RKDN400
RLG630
32
33
34
35
RLG630E
RLDN600
RNDN1200

36
Maximum
Amperes

B
100
100
225
125
225
19.91 (505.7)
19.91 (505.7)
25.65 (651.5)
25.65 (651.5)
25.66 (651.8)
9.16 (232.7)
9.19 (232.7)
11.30 (287.0)
11.30 (287.0)
9.16 (232.7)
9.31 (236.5)
9.31 (236.5)
10.93 (277.6)
10.93 (277.6)
9.31 (236.5)
18.53 (470.7)
18.53 (470.7)
24.26 (616.2)
24.26 (616.2)
24.28 (616.7)
1.70 (43.2)
1.70 (43.2)
1.73 (43.9)
1.73 (43.9)
1.70 (43.2)
16 (7)
19 (9)
22 (10)
22 (10)
19 (9)
250
250
250
400
600
37.47 (951.7)
37.47 (951.7)
37.50 (952.5)
41.69 (1058.9)
53.37 (1355.6)
12.16 (308.9)
12.16 (308.9)
11.88 (301.8)
12.31 (312.7)
23.06 (585.7)
11.29 (286.8)
11.29 (286.8)
10.22 (259.6)
14.06 (357.1)
14.10 (358.1)
35.73 (907.5)
35.73 (907.5)
35.77 (908.6)
39.94 (1014.5)
51.63 (1311.4)
1.84 (46.7)
1.84 (46.7)
1.94 (49.3)
1.97 (50.0)
1.94 (49.3)
32 (15)
32 (15)
37 (17)
58 (26)
94 (43)
53.37 (1355.6)
48.31 (1227.1)
63.59 (1615.2)
23.06 (585.7)
15.56 (395.2)
22.63 (574.8)
14.10 (358.1)
15.50 (393.7)
17.63 (447.8)
51.63 (1311.4)
46.56 (1182.6)
61.84 (1570.7)
1.94 (49.3)
1.92 (48.8)
1.97 (50.0)
94 (43)
84 (38)
175 (80)
600
600
1200

Single centered mounting hole provided on RFDN100, Series B.
For earth leakage applications.
37
ON
A
A
OFF
39
41
38
40
Approximate Weight
in Lbs (kg)
Figure 27.4-18. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof
D
OFF
F
Figure 27.4-19. NEMA 3R Rainproof
42
43
CA08104001E

December 2013
27.4-55
Sheet 27 131

Table 27.4-139. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless SteelDimensions in Inches (mm)
E
B
Catalog
Number
D
A
Approximate
Weight Lbs (kg)
Maximum Dimensions
Amperes
A
B
Figure 27.4-20. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel
WGDN100
16 (7)
100
19.91
(505.6)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
18.53
(470.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WFDN100
16 (7)
100
19.91
(505.6)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
18.53
(470.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WFDN150
20 (9)
150
25.66
(651.7)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
24.28
(616.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WFDN225
20 (9)
225
25.66
(651.7)
8.84
(224.6)
9.31
(236.6)
24.28
(616.7)
1.70
(43.3)
WJDN250
39 (18)
250
37.50
(952.5)
11.56
(293.7)
10.22
(259.6)
35.77
(908.5)
1.94
(49.2)
WKDN400
60 (27)
400
41.69
(1058.9)
11.75
(298.4)
14.06
(357.2)
39.94
(1014.4)
1.97
(50.0)
WLDN600
88 (40)
600
48.31
(1227.2)
14.91
(378.6)
15.50
(393.7)
46.56
(1182.7)
1.92
(48.8)
WLG630
39 (18)
600
37.50
(952.5)
11.56
(293.7)
10.22
(259.6)
35.77
(908.5)
1.94
(49.2)
185 (84)
1200
63.59
(1615.3)
22.00
(558.8)
17.63
(447.7)
61.84
(1570.8)
1.97
(50.0)
ON
OFF
22
WNDN1200
Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 27.4-141 for breaker weights.
Table 27.4-140. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals15250ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Breaker
Size
Amperes
Number
of
Outlets
Dimensions
Mounting
A
Inside
J
Outside
D
K
Dim
Standard
Conduit
Size
Approximate
Weight
Lbs
kg
XFDN050B
1550
5.50
13.13
14.13
6.13
10.75
5.25
10.63
15.25
8.88
(139.7) (333.5) (358.9) (155.7) (273.1) (133.4) (270.0) (387.4) (225.6)
2.00
(50.8)
1.50
(38.1)
38
17.3
XFDN100B
60100
6.00
18.00
19.00
6.50
16.00
5.50
11.00
20.50
9.00
(152.4) (457.2) (482.6) (165.1) (406.4) (139.7) (279.4) (520.7) (228.6)
2.31
(58.7)
2.00
(50.8)
57
25.9
XFDN225B
125225
10.25
22.63
(260.4) (574.8)
11.38
20.00
6.38
16.38
25.13
9.63
(289.1) (508.0) (162.1) (416.1) (638.3) (244.6)
3.50
(88.9)
2.50
(63.5)
104
47.2
70225
8.50
27.13
(215.9) (689.1)
11.25
29.88
7.38
16.00
29.50
12.31
(285.8) (759.0) (187.5) (406.4) (749.3) (312.7)
4.00
3.00
(101.6) (76.2)
145
65.8
9.50
27.25
(241.3) (692.2)
11.25
29.88
8.06
16.38
35.00
12.38
(285.8) (759.0) (204.7) (416.1) (889.0) (314.5)
4.19
4.00
(106.4) (101.6)
170
77.2
XJDN225B
XJDN250B

250
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
(2) 1/2-inch
(12.7 mm)
NPT
38
39
40
41
42
Figure 27.4-21. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant SealsDual 3 and 4 Point Mounting Available as Standard on F-Frame 100A and Below
CA08104001E
43

December 2013
Sheet 27 132
22
Table 27.4-141. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant Seals4001200ADimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Breaker
Size
Amperes
23
24
25
26
Enclosure
Mounting
Conduit
Standard
Conduit
Size
Location
Lbs
XKDN400B
400
35.00
(889.0)
16.38
(416.1)
12.63
(320.8)
9.50
(241.3)
27.25
(692.2)
3.00
(76.2)
4.19
(106.4)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8
170
77
XLDN600B
600
37.88
(962.2)
23.88
(606.6)
14.25
(362.0)
16.00
(406.4)
45.38
(1152.7)
4.00
(101.6)
5.00
(127.0)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8
419
191
XKCN800B
800
47.88
(1216.2)
13.63
(346.2)
12.81
(325.4)
16.13
(409.7)
40.75
(1035.1)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8
228
104
1200
64.00
(1625.6)
26.00
(660.4)
21.38
(543.1)
27.56
(700.0)
38.63
(981.2)
6.50
(165.1)
4.38
(111.3)
4.00
(101.6)
1, 3 and 6, 8
567
257
XNDN1200B
27
Weight

Overall
Enclosure

kg
Power cables must enter and leave from opposite ends (through-feed).
Table 27.4-142. Typical Breaker Weights
28
Conduit Position No.
2 3
G-MTG.
Holes (4)
29
F-MTG.
A
30
Lbs
kg
G
E
F
2
3
5
0.9
1.4
2.3
J
K
L
12
13
20
5.4
5.9
9.1
M
N
30
45
13.6
20.4
31
Frame
32
H H
E-MT
8
7 6
33
Figure 27.4-22. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather-Resistant Seals
34
35
Table 27.4-143. Circuit Breaker Enclosure Interpretation Data

1st Field
Enclosure
Type
NEMA 1
36
37
Flush
Surface
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
NEMA 12K
NEMA 4/4X, 5
NEMA 7/9
38
Stainless
Cast Al.
F
S
R
J
D
W
X
1st 2nd
Field Field
39
2nd Field
Breaker
Family
3rd Field
Maximum
Ampacity
NEMA
Enclosure
Type
Definitions
NEMA
Standard
G-Frame
F-Frame
J-Frame
K-Frame
L-Frame
M-Frame
N-Frame
50
100
150
225
250
400
600
1200
Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of
protection against contact with the enclosed equipment.
3R
Type 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree
of protection against falling rain, sleet and external ice formation.
12
Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily

to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt
and dripping noncorrosive liquids.
12K
Type 12K enclosures with knockouts are intended for indoor use
primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt
and dripping noncorrosive liquids other than at knockouts.
4/4X
Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily

to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain,
splashing water, and hose-directed water, and corrosion; and will
be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
Type 5 enclosures are used for indoor use primarily to provide a

degree of protection against dust and falling dirt.
Type 7 enclosures are for use indoors in locations classified

as Class I, Groups B, C or D as defined in the National Electrical Code.
Type 9 enclosures are for use in indoor locations classified as

Class II, Groups E, F or G as defined in the National Electrical Code.
3rd
Field
R FD N 150
40
NEMA
Enclosure
41
42

Breaker
Frame
NEMA
Enclosure
N in this position indicates enclosure complies with NEC gutter space requirement.
XFDN050 is not Group B compliant.
43
CA08104001E

MCCB Eaton

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MCCB Eaton

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MCCB Eaton

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

27.0-2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

Summary of Differences Between Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers,

Low voltage power circuit breakers comply with the

Molded-case circuit breakers and insulated-case circuit

Selective trip over full range of fault

Selective trip over partial range of fault

Selective trip over a smaller range of fault

Types of operators: mechanically

Types of operators: mechanically operated

Types of operators: mechanically

5-cycle closing for electrically

5-cycle closing for electrically

Greater than 5-cycle closing for electrically

Available in drawout construction

Available in drawout construction

Typically fixed-mounted but large frame

Interrupting duty at 635 Vac:

Interrupting duty at 508 Vac:

Interrupting duty at 480 Vac:

Special current limiting types available

Special current limiting types available

Current limiting available with and without

Small number of frame sizes available.

Small number of frame sizes available.

Large number of frame sizes available.

Extensive maintenance possible on all

Limited maintenance possible on larger

Very limited maintenance possible on larger

Used in enclosures, MCCs, switchboards

Used in enclosures, MCCs

Used in enclosures, panelboards,

Not available in series ratings

Not available in series ratings

Available in series ratings

100% continuous current rated in

80% continuous-current rated, unless

80% continuous-current rated, unless

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers

Time Current Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . .

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

27.0-4 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

This page intentionally left blank.

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures

Circuit Breaker Components

Thermal trip action is achieved

Electronic RMS Trip Breakers

Eaton thermal-magnetic breakers are

Adjustable long-time pickup

Trip unit adjustments are made by

The function of the DE-ION arc

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

27.1-2 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers & Enclosures